JP6766643B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

In the gaming machine of the pachinko machine or the like, there is a gaming machine provided with a moving-enabled mobile member (Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2012-21238

However, in the conventional gaming machines described above, there is a problem that regarding the Re not a position of the moving member could be improved.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the misalignment of moving members.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 has a predetermined member, a shaft-supporting means whose one end is rotatably supported by a predetermined member and a first means of the predetermined member , and a shaft-supported means thereof. A moving member arranged at the other end of the supporting means and configured to be movable between a first position and a second position different from the first position, and a driving force of the moving member. The driving device includes a transmission gear for transmitting a driving force to the shaft-supported means, and the predetermined member has the transmission gear falling off from the central axis. A second means capable of preventing this is provided, and the one end portion of the shafted support means is a portion in which gear teeth are formed in an arc shape centered on the rotation axis of the one end portion. A passive gear portion meshed with the transmission gear is provided, and a part of the transmission gear is configured to be arranged to face the shaft-supported means in the rotation axis direction.

The gaming machine according to claim 2 includes a board box in the gaming machine according to claim 1.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 1, it is possible to improve the misalignment of the moving member.

According to the gaming machine according to the second aspect, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine according to the first aspect, the control device can be housed inside the substrate box.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of the operation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the operation unit which looked at the disassembled operation unit from the front. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front view exploded perspective view of a game board and a board lower part unit. It is a front view exploded perspective view of a game board and a board lower part unit. It is a rear view exploded perspective view of a game board and a board lower part unit. It is a front view exploded perspective view of a variable winning device. It is a rear view exploded perspective view of a variable winning device. (A) is a top view of the variable winning device, (b) is a front view of the variable winning device, and (c) is a side view of the variable winning device in the direction of arrow XVc of FIG. 15 (b). is there. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device in line XVIa-XVIa of FIG. 15 (b), and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device after sliding the moving upper lid member from FIG. 16 (a). It is a sectional view. (A) and (b) are partial front views of the game board. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the lower board unit in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (b), and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the lower board unit in line XVIIIb-XVIIIb of FIG. 17 (a). (C) is a cross-sectional view of the lower board unit in which the arrangement of the light irradiation unit is virtually changed from FIG. 18 (b). It is a front perspective view of the compound operation unit. It is a rear perspective view of a compound operation unit. It is a front view exploded perspective view of a compound operation unit. It is a rear view exploded perspective view of a compound operation unit. It is a front view exploded perspective view of a main body member, a shielding member and a swinging member. It is a rear view exploded perspective view of a main body member, a shielding member, and a swinging member. (A) is a front view of the first guide arm, (b) is a bottom view of the first guide arm, and (c) is a first guide arm in the XXVc-XXVc line of FIG. 25 (a). FIG. 25 (d) is a cross-sectional view of the first guide arm in the line XXVd-XXVd of FIG. 25 (a). (A) is a front view of the second guide arm, (b) is a bottom view of the second guide arm, and (c) is a second guide arm in the XXVIc-XXVIc line of FIG. 26 (a). (D) is a cross-sectional view of the second guide arm in the line XXVId-XXVid of FIG. 26 (a). (A) and (b) are front views of the first guide arm, the second guide arm, and the wiring. It is a front view of the compound operation unit. It is a rear view of a compound operation unit. It is a front view of the compound operation unit. It is a rear view of a compound operation unit. It is a front view of the compound operation unit. It is a rear view of a compound operation unit. It is a partial cross-sectional view of the composite operation unit in the XXXXV-XXXIV line of FIG. It is a partial cross-sectional view of the composite operation unit in the XXXV-XXXV line of FIG. It is a front view of the compound operation unit. It is a partial cross-sectional view of the composite operation unit in line XXXVII-XXXVII of FIG. It is a front perspective view of the rocking operation unit. It is a rear perspective view of a rocking operation unit. It is a front view exploded perspective view of a rocking operation unit. It is a rear view exploded perspective view of a swinging operation unit. (A) is a front view of the rocking operation unit, and (b) is a side view of the rocking operation unit in the direction of arrow XXXIIb of FIG. 42 (a). It is a front view of the rocking operation unit. (A) is a cross-sectional view of a drive side arm member, a driven side arm member, and a first bridge member in the line XXXXIVa-XXXIVa of FIG. 43, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the drive side arm in the line XXXXIVb-XXXIVb of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the member, the driven side arm member, and the 2nd bridge member. (A) is a partial side view of the swinging operation unit in the direction of arrow XXXVa in FIG. 43, and (b) and (c) show the driven side arm member flexing to the front side from the state of FIG. 45 (a). It is a partial side view of the rocking operation unit which showed the state of squeezing in time series. It is sectional drawing of the drive side arm member and the driven side arm member in the XXXXIV-XXXXIV line of FIG. 43. It is a partial cross-sectional view of the rocking operation unit in the XXXXV-XXXXV line of FIG. 43. It is a front view of the drive side arm member and the driven side arm member. It is a front view of the drive side arm member and the driven side arm member. It is a front view of the drive side arm member and the driven side arm member. (A) and (b) are partial front views of the swinging operation unit in the second embodiment. (A) to (c) are front views of the swinging motion unit according to the third embodiment, and (d) is a cross-sectional view of the swinging motion unit on the Ld-Ld line of FIG. 52 (b). It is a front view of the composite operation unit in 4th Embodiment. (A) and (b) are partial front views of the composite operation unit. It is a rear view of the composite operation unit in 5th Embodiment. (A) to (c) are partial rear views of the composite operation unit. It is a partial front view of the composite operation unit in the sixth embodiment. (A) and (b) are partial front views of the composite operation unit. (A) and (b) are partial front views of the swinging operation unit in the seventh embodiment. It is a front view of the game board in 8th Embodiment. It is a partial cross-sectional view of the game board in the LXI-LXI line of FIG. (A) is a front view of the first guide arm in the ninth embodiment, (b) is a bottom view of the first guide arm, and (c) is a perspective view of a detachable front locking member. .. (A) is a front view of the second guide arm, (b) is a bottom view of the second guide arm, and (c) is a second guide arm on the LXIIIc-LXIIIc line of FIG. 63 (a). It is a cross-sectional view of. (A) and (b) are front views of the first guide arm and the second guide arm of the wiring guide arm, and (c) is the first of the wiring guide arm in the LXIVc-LXIVc line of FIG. 64 (a). It is sectional drawing of the guide arm and the 2nd guide arm.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 50, as a first embodiment, an embodiment when the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. It is provided with an inner frame 12 that is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) in order to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning openings 63, 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back surface side. A ball (game ball) flows down the front of the game board 13 to perform a bullet game. The inner frame 12 includes a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball into the front region of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front region of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) etc. are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis for the front frame. The 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface. The lock of the inner frame 12 and the lock of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is formed by assembling decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open so as to project toward the front side, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to be inclined downward to the right side in front view (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) by the inclination. Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the effect content of the super reach. To.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change and control the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. Illuminations 29 to 33 having a light emitting means such as an LED are provided on the peripheral edge of the window 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination unit 29 to 33 lights up by lighting or blinking the built-in LED at the time of jackpot or reach production. Or, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is built in, and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying when the prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs is provided.

Further, on the lower side of the illuminated portion 32 on the right side, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a sticking space K1 on the front of the game board 13 (FIG. The certificate stamp or the like attached to (see 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more glitter, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin having chrome plating is attached to the region around the illumination portions 29 to 33.

A ball lending operation unit 40 is arranged below the window unit 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the remaining amount is displayed as a numerical value as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present on the card or the like. Will be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine, a so-called cash machine, in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 is not required. A decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the above to make the component configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines and cash machines that use card units.

In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface in the central portion thereof. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive the ball into the front of the game board 13 is arranged.

Inside the operation handle 51, there is a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball launch unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation period, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. It has a built-in variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of dynamic operation (rotation position) by the change in electrical resistance. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the amount of rotation operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is launched with a strength (launching intensity) corresponding to the above, and the ball is driven into the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball pulling lever 52 for operating the ball stored in the lower plate 50 when the ball stored in the lower plate 50 is discharged downward is provided in the lower front portion of the lower plate 50. The ball pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as a "thousand-car box") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. An operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and an ashtray 53 is attached to the left side of the lower plate 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 machined into a substantially square shape in front view, a large number of nails (not shown) and windmills (not shown) for ball guidance, and a rail 61. , 62, general winning opening 63, first winning opening 64, second winning opening 640, variable winning device 330, through gate 67, variable display device unit 80, etc. are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is an inner frame 12 (FIG. 1) is attached to the back side. The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. The general winning opening 63 and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are fixed from the front side of the game board 13 by tapping screws or the like. The first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, and the variable winning device 330 are formed in the board surface lower unit 300 fitted into the receiving opening 60a of the base plate 60, which will be described later.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described with reference to FIG. 2.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 like the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the front outer circumference of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back, so that the front of the game board 13 has a ball. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is the area in front of the game board 13 that is partitioned by the two rails 61 and 62 and the resin outer edge member 73 that connects the rails (a winning opening or the like is arranged and fired). This is the area where the rails flow down.

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage. Will be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a predetermined momentum hits the return rubber 69 and has momentum. Is dampened and bounced back toward the center.

In the lower left side of the front view (lower left side of FIG. 2) of the game area, first symbol display devices 37A and 37B including a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are arranged. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used properly depending on whether the ball has won the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the first The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the probabilistic change, the time reduction, or the normal state by the lighting state, or indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the changing state or not by the lighting state. , Whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to the probability variation jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the normal jackpot, or a missed symbol is indicated by the lighting state, the number of reserved balls is indicated by the lighting state, and the round during the jackpot is indicated by the 7-segment display device. Display the number and error. It should be noted that the plurality of LEDs are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and the combination of the emission colors can suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed when the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 have won a prize. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and if it is determined to be a big hit, it also determines the type of the big hit. As the jackpot type determined here, 15R probability variation jackpot, 4R probability variation jackpot, and 15R normal jackpot are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the lottery result is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, but if it is a big hit, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is shown. ..

Here, the "15R probability variation jackpot" is a probability variation jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after the jackpot of 15 rounds, and the "4R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4 rounds. It is a probabilistic jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after. Further, "15R normal jackpot" is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds is 15 rounds, and then the probability shifts to a low probability state, and the time is shortened during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). is there.

In addition, the "high probability state" refers to a state in which the subsequent jackpot probability increases as an added value after the jackpot ends, that is, during a so-called probability fluctuation (probability change), in other words, a game in which it is easy to shift to a special gaming state. It is the state of. The high-probability state (during probabilistic change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the winning probability of the second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640. The "low probability state" refers to a state in which the probability change is not in progress, and a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than in the probability change state. In addition, in the "low probability state", the time saving state (time saving medium) is a state in which the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability remains the same and only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased to increase the second winning opening 640. It refers to the state of the game in which the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state, it is a state of the game in which neither the probability change nor the time reduction is performed (the jackpot probability and the hit probability of the second symbol are not increased).

During the probability change and the time reduction, not only the hit probability of the second symbol increases, but also the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened is changed, which is a longer time than the normal time. Set. When the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (open state), the ball wins the second winning opening 640 as compared with the case where the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state). It will be easy. Therefore, during the probability change or the time reduction, the ball can easily win the second winning opening 640, and the number of times the big hit lottery is performed can be increased.

In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the opening time of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is not changed, or in addition to changing the opening time, electric power is applied at one time. The change may be made to increase the number of times that the accessory 640a is opened more than in the normal state. Further, during the probability change or the time reduction, the hit probability of the second symbol is not changed, and the electric accessory 640a is opened at the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened and at one hit. At least one of the times may be changed. In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened and the number of times when the electric accessory 640a is opened at one time is not performed, and the second symbol is hit. Only the probability may be changed to be higher than the normal one.

In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are arranged in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is triggered by winning a prize (starting prize) in the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640, and synchronizes with the variable display in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, while synchronizing the third symbol. It is composed of a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as "display device") that performs variable display, and an LED that variablely displays the second symbol triggered by the passage of a sphere of a through gate 67. A second symbol display device (not shown) is provided. Further, in the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch size liquid crystal display, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), for example, the upper, middle, and lower 3 Two symbol columns are displayed. Each symbol string is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol string, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It has become like. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed by the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), whereas the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display the game state. A decorative display is performed according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B. In addition, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

The second symbol display device alternately lights the “○” symbol and the “×” symbol as the display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) each time the sphere passes through the through gate 67 for a predetermined time. It is a variable display. When the pachinko machine 10 detects that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a winning, the symbol "○" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the second symbol. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a failure, the symbol of "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the third symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variation display on the second symbol display device is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, the symbol “○”), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is used for a predetermined time. It is configured to be in operation (open) only.

The time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability change or the time reduction than when the game state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and the time reduction, the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that the winning lottery can be performed more than during the normal time. Therefore, since the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, it is possible to give the player many opportunities to open the electric accessory 640a of the second winning opening 640. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 640 during the probability change and the time saving.

In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the second winning opening 640 can be reached during the probability change or the time reduction by other methods such as increasing the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a per hit. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter than the normal time during the probability change or the time reduction, the hit probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, or one hit. The opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board 13 in the left and right regions of the variable display device unit 80, and is configured so that a part of the balls launched on the game board 13 can pass through. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the winning lottery result is a winning symbol, a symbol "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the winning lottery result is incorrect. For example, a symbol of "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

The number of times the ball has passed through the through gate 67 is held up to a total of four times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and on the second symbol holding lamp (not shown). Is also lit and displayed. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holding lamps, and are symmetrically arranged below the third symbol display device 81.

The variation display of the second symbol is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third. It may be performed by using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls for the passage of the balls of the through gate 67 is not limited to 4, but may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, the number of through gates 67 assembled is not limited to two, and may be one, for example. Further, the assembly position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the left and right sides of the variable display device unit 80, and may be, for example, below the variable display device unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol holding lamp.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first winning opening 64 in which a ball can win a prize is arranged. When a ball wins in the first winning opening 64, the first winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 is caused by turning on the first winning opening switch. A big hit lottery is made in (see FIG. 4), and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, below the front view of the first winning opening 64, a second winning opening 640 in which the ball can win is arranged. When the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the second winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 is caused by the turning on of the second winning opening switch. A big hit lottery is made in (see FIG. 4), and the display according to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

In addition, each of the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 is also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball wins a prize. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 640 are configured to be the same. , The number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 640 are different numbers, for example, balls to the first winning opening 64. The number of prize balls paid out when a prize is won may be three, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball is won in the second winning opening 640 may be configured as five.

An electric accessory 640a is attached to the second winning opening 640. The electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to win a prize in the second winning opening 640. On the other hand, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variation display of the second symbol performed when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged). (State), and the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize in the second winning opening 640.

As described above, during the probabilistic change and the time reduction, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than during the normal time, and the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is short. Therefore, in the variation display of the second symbol, "○" The symbol "" is easily displayed, and the number of times that the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Further, during the probability change and the time reduction, the time for opening the electric accessory 640a is also longer than during the normal operation. Therefore, during the probability change and the time reduction, it is possible to create a state in which the ball can easily win the second winning opening 640 as compared with the normal time.

Here, the probability of winning a jackpot is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state when the ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and when the ball wins in the second winning opening 640. However, the probability of becoming a 15R probability variation jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the case of a jackpot is higher when the ball wins the second winning opening 640 than when the ball wins the first winning opening 64. It is set. On the other hand, the first winning opening 64 does not have an electric accessory as in the second winning opening 640, and the ball is in a state where it can always win a prize.

Therefore, in normal times, the electric accessory attached to the second winning opening 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 640. Therefore, toward the first winning opening 64 without the electric accessory. Then, the ball is fired so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called "left-handed"), and by winning the first winning opening 64, many chances of a big hit lottery are obtained and the big hit is obtained. It is advantageous for the player to aim at that.

On the other hand, during the probability change or the time reduction, by passing the ball through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is likely to be opened, and the second winning opening 640 is likely to be won. Therefore, the ball is fired toward the second winning opening 640 so that the ball passes to the right of the variable display device 80 (so-called "right-handed"), and the electric accessory is opened by passing through the through gate 67. At the same time, it is advantageous for the player to aim for a 15R probability variation jackpot by winning the second winning opening 640.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, since the configuration of the game board 13 is symmetrical, it is possible to aim at the first winning opening 64 by "right-handed" or to aim at the second winning opening 640 by "left-handing". You can also aim. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is a method of firing a ball to the player according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in the probabilistic change, in the time saving, or in the normal state). Can be eliminated from changing to "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the hassle of changing the way the ball is hit.

A variable winning device 330 (see FIG. 11) is arranged below the first winning opening 64, and a specific winning opening 65a is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to winning the first winning slot 64 or the second winning slot 640 becomes a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, the jackpot stop symbol is displayed. The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so that the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. As this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls are won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a lapse of a predetermined time, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which this opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state that is advantageous for the player, and the player is given a larger amount of prize balls than usual as a game value (game value). Is done. The details of the variable winning device 330 (see FIG. 11) that opens and closes the specific winning opening 65a will be described later, but briefly, the moving upper lid member 332 of the variable winning device 330 slides to move the specific winning opening 65a. It is opened and closed.

The special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. A large opening that opens and closes separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big hit is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time. A special game in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time when the ball wins a prize in the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is open. It may be formed as a state. Further, the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or two or more (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is also the lower right side of the first winning opening 64 or the first. Not limited to the lower left side of the winning opening 64, for example, the left side of the variable display device unit 80 may be used.

A sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate stamp, an identification label, or the like is provided in the right corner on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate stamp or the like stuck on the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with an out port 314. Balls that flow down the game area and do not win any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640 are guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the out opening 314. The out openings 314 are arranged in pairs on the left and right sides of the specific winning opening 65a.

A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, a random number generator used for various lottery, and for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the launch control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). Further, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing sticker is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing sticker is to be peeled off in order to open the board boxes 100 and 102, or if the board boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are used. Cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4) are provided. ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls are appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the launch control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built in. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 is used to perform main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as a jackpot lottery, display settings in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device. To execute.

In order to instruct the operation of the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller in only one direction.

The RAM 203 includes various areas, counters, flags, a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return destination address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. It has a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power supply is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power on due to power failure elimination; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (not shown) when the power is cut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (not shown) at the time of turning on the power. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured so that a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interrupt process (not shown) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 is centered on the lower side of the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol hold lamp, and the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the front side, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205. To send.

Further, the input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown), a slide position detection sensor S, a sensor group including a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115. Is connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured so that the power failure signal SG1 is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, the NMI interrupt process (not shown) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball. .. The ball launch unit 112a includes a launch solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and the electromagnet are allowed to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the rotation operation amount (rotation position) of the handle 51, and the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the operation amount of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output in an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an on / off output in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variation effect (variation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as the display) and the advance notice effect. The MPU 221 which is an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 which stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 221, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, other devices 228, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively. The other device 228 includes a drive motor 433,462,551 and a solenoid 474.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and commands the determined display mode. (Display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.) notifies the display control device 114. Further, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed or the super reach can be changed. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect content of the time. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. .. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113.

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) indicating the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice corresponding to the display content according to the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the voice output device 226, and also outputs the voice corresponding to the display content. The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled according to the display content.

In the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81 are connected, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the variation effect of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81 and the like is performed. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice from the voice output device 226 according to the display content indicated by this display command, so that the display of the third symbol display device 81 and the voice output from the voice output device 226 are matched. be able to.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and has a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251 and determines that a power failure (power failure, power failure) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volt. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient period of time to execute the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It transmits to the device 111.

Next, the game board 13 and the operation unit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 9. First, the storage structure of the units 400 and 500 in the rear case 210 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 and 6.

FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the operation unit 200, and FIG. 6 is an exploded front perspective view of the operation unit 200 with the disassembled operation unit 200 viewed from the front.

As shown in FIGS. 5 and 6, one side (front side of the paper in FIG. 6) of the operation unit 200 is opened from the bottom wall portion 211 and the outer wall portion 212 erected from the outer edge of the bottom wall portion 211. A back case 210 formed in a box shape is provided. The back case 210 is formed in the shape of a rectangular frame in front view by forming a rectangular opening 211a in the center of the bottom wall portion 211. The opening 211a is formed in a size corresponding to the outer shape of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) (that is, the third symbol display device 81 can be arranged).

The left and right and upper outer wall portions 212 include an intermediate wall portion 212a formed in parallel with the bottom wall portion 211 in the middle in the front-rear direction, and a fastening portion 212b to which a member can be fastened to the intermediate wall portion 212a. On the front side of the intermediate wall portion 212a, the outer wall portion 212 extends from the opposite end of the opening 211a of the intermediate wall portion 212a, and on the back side of the intermediate wall portion 212a, the outer wall portion 212 is the intermediate wall portion. It extends from the end of the 212a on the side close to the opening 211a.

A holding and fixing portion 446 and a fixing plate 461 are fastened and fixed to the fastening portions 212b formed on the left and right intermediate wall portions 212a, and a guide plate 424 is attached to the fastening portion 212b formed on the upper intermediate wall portion 212a. Is fastened and fixed.

Here, the fixing plate 461 is a member that supports the drive motor 462 that generates a driving force that drives the composite operation unit 400, and the holding and fixing portion 446 is a member that fixes one end of the urging spring 445, and is a guide plate 424. Is a member that guides the movement of the connecting member 423 (see FIG. 20) of the composite operation unit 400. That is, all of them are not the production parts that are directly visible to the player, but the parts that have an auxiliary role of the production, such as generating the driving force for the operation of the composite operation unit 400 and guiding the operation. ..

By arranging the fixing plate 461 having such a role, the holding and fixing portion 446, and the guide plate 424 closer to the front side of the back case 210, a space closer to the rear side of the back case 210 can be opened. By using this vacant space near the rear side as a space for retracting a portion of the shielding member 420 or the like that is actually visible to the player, the constituent members of the composite operation unit 400 can be laminated in the front-rear direction, and the opening 211a can be stacked. The width required to retract the combined operation unit 400 to the outside of the unit 400 can be narrowed. Therefore, the forming width of the bottom plate portion 211 can be narrowed. As a result, the opening 211a can be expanded, and the formation range of the third symbol display device 81 can be expanded.

In the operation unit 200, the composite operation unit 400 and the swing operation unit 500 are respectively housed in the internal space of the rear case 210, and these are configured as one unit.

Specifically, the composite operation unit 400 is arranged on the left, right, left and right and upper part of the area formed by the inner surface of the outer wall portion 212 of the back case 210, and the swing operation unit 500 is inside the outer wall portion 212 of the back case 210. It is arranged at the bottom of the area formed by the side surface (see FIG. 5).

Next, with reference to FIGS. 7 to 9, the outline of the operation mode of the combined operation unit 400 and the swing operation unit 500 will be described. In the description of FIGS. 7 to 9, FIGS. 5 and 6 will be referred to as appropriate.

7 to 9 are front views of the operating unit 200. In FIG. 7, the main body member 410 of the composite operation unit 400 is arranged at the overhang position, in FIG. 8, the moving member 540 of the swing operation unit 500 is arranged at the overhang position, and in FIG. 9, The state in which the main body member 410 of the composite operation unit 400 and the moving member 540 of the swing operation unit 500 are arranged at the overhanging positions is shown.

As shown in FIG. 7, the composite operation unit 400 operates the main body member 410 between the retracted position shown in FIG. 5 and the overhanging position shown in FIG. That is, at the retracted position shown in FIG. 5, the main body member 410 is retracted above the opening 211a of the rear case 210 (see FIG. 2). On the other hand, at the overhanging position shown in FIG. 7, the main body member 410 is lowered, and the main body member 410 is arranged at the center of the opening 211a of the rear case 210 (that is, in front of the third symbol display device 81, see FIG. 2). .. As will be described later, the composite operation unit 400 is a unit in which the shielding member 420 performs two types of operations (sliding operation and rocking operation) in different movement modes when the main body member 410 slides and moves.

As shown in FIG. 8, the swinging operation unit 500 operates the moving member 540 between the retracted position shown in FIG. 5 and the overhanging position shown in FIG. At the retracted position shown in FIG. 5, the moving member 540 is retracted below the opening 211a of the rear case 210 (see FIG. 2). On the other hand, at the overhanging position shown in FIG. 8, the moving member 540 is raised, and the moving member 540 is arranged at the center of the opening 211a of the rear case 210 (that is, in front of the third symbol display device 81, see FIG. 2). .. A pair of left and right moving members 540 are formed, and at the overhanging position shown in FIG. 8, the pair of left and right moving members 540 are united and visually recognized.

As shown in FIG. 9, both the combined operation unit 400 and the swing operation unit 500 can be arranged at the overhanging position. In this case, the composite operation unit 400 and the swing operation unit 500 can be visually recognized as an integral decorative member (partially overlapped in a front view), and a decorative member having a width equal to or larger than the outer width of the opening 211a is formed. be able to. Thereby, the effect of the combined operation unit 400 and the swing operation unit 500 can be improved. Further, by projecting the composite operation unit 400 and the swing operation unit 500 toward the center of the opening 211a in different directions (descending, ascending), for example, as compared with the case where all the movable members are projected in the same direction. The distance that each member moves from the retracted position to the overhanging position can be shortened. As a result, when the moving speeds of the combined operation unit 400 and the swinging operation unit 500 are the same, the period of movement from the retracted position to the overhanging position can be shortened.

Next, the board surface lower unit 300 arranged in the lower part of the game board 13 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 to 18. 10 and 11 are front exploded perspective views of the game board 13 and the lower board unit 300, and FIG. 12 is a rear exploded perspective view of the game board 13 and the lower board unit 300. In addition, in FIG. 10, only the front plate member 320 is disassembled from the game plate 13, and in FIGS. 11 and 12, the front unit 310 and the variable winning device 330 of the board surface lower unit 300 are further played from FIG. It is disassembled from the board 13. Further, in order to facilitate understanding, the game board 13 is shown in a simplified manner.

As shown in FIG. 10, a specific winning opening 65a is formed along the lower edge of the inner rail 61. Since the lower edge of the inner rail 61 is formed from a downwardly convex curved shape, the arrangement position of the specific winning opening 65a is set as compared with the case where the lower side of the specific winning opening 65a is formed by a straight line along the left-right direction. Can be lowered downwards. The outer edge of the specific winning opening 65a has an upper side formed by a moving upper lid member 332, a lower side formed by a lower edge of an inner rail 61, and left and right sides formed by left and right wall portions of an opening upper portion 313. ..

As will be described later, the specific winning opening 65a can be switched between the closed state and the open state by sliding the moving upper lid member 332 back and forth, and the opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a is, for example, 15 at the maximum. It can be repeated once (15 rounds).

As shown in FIG. 11, the board surface lower unit 300 is a unit constituting an out opening 314 from which a ball is discharged and a specific winning opening 65a, and is a receiving receiving hole formed in the lower part of the game board 13 in the front-rear direction. The front unit 310 that is fitted into the opening 60a from the front side and fastened and fixed, the front plate member 320 that is fastened and fixed to the front unit 310 from the front side and a ball path is formed on the back side, and the receiving opening 60a. It mainly includes a variable winning device 330 including a moving upper lid member 332 that is fitted from the back side, fastened and fixed, and changes the flow direction of the ball.

The front unit 310 includes a plate-shaped main body plate portion 311 formed so that a ball can flow down on the front side, and an electric accessory 640a in which a pair of members are opened and closed left and right at the center of the front side of the main body plate portion 311. , A plate-shaped inclined plate portion 312 projecting from the upper left and right sides of the main body plate portion 311 to the front side, an opening upper portion 313 recessed upward from the lower bottom portion of the main body plate portion 311 and an opening upper side thereof. A pair of out ports 314, which are bored in the front-rear direction on both the left and right sides of the portion 313 and the balls are discharged out of the game area, are mainly provided.

The main body plate portion 311 is bored in the front-rear direction at a position surrounded by a pair of members of the first winning opening lower side 311a formed above the electric accessory 640a and forming the lower side of the first winning opening 64 and the electric accessory 640a. The second winning opening 640 to be provided, the light irradiation device 311b arranged below the second winning opening 640 and illuminating the front side of the second winning opening 640, and the rib-shaped front side on the outside of the out opening 314. It is mainly provided with a ball flow rib 311c that is convexly provided.

The light irradiation device 311b is accommodated in the accommodating recess 323a (see FIG. 12) of the front plate member 320, and is directed upward (the second winning opening 640 side) due to the ball winning in the second winning opening 640. It is an LED member that is irradiated with light.

The ball sink rib 311c adjusts the flow direction of the ball rolling along the inner rail 61, and the details will be described later in FIG.

The inclined plate portion 312 is formed so that a sphere can roll on the upper side surface, is arranged above the left and right of the electric accessory 640a, and is inclined downward so as to be closer to the electric accessory 640a. As a result, when the electric accessory 640a is in the open state where it falls to the left or right, the ball that rolls down the inclined plate portion 312 can be made to win the second winning opening 640 with high probability. On the other hand, when the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state in which it stands up, the ball that rolls on the inclined plate portion 312 and flows down can be dropped to the front side of the opening upper portion 313 with high probability.

The upper portion 313 of the opening is formed so as to be inclined upward toward the center of the left and right sides. Here, by setting the vertical width of the central portion in the left-right direction of the specific winning opening 65a to be equal to or larger than the diameter of the sphere, the vertical width of the left and right wall portions of the opening upper portion 313 (corresponding to the left and right wall portions of the specific winning opening 65a). ) Can be set to a length equal to or less than the diameter of the sphere (see FIG. 17). In this case, it is difficult to win the ball from the left and right ends of the specific winning opening 65a, but the ball is flowed down to the central portion of the game board 13 along the inner rail 61, and the central portion in the left-right direction of the specific winning opening 65a. Since it is possible to win a prize from, the game can be continued.

Here, when the upper and lower side surfaces of the specific winning opening 65a are parallel surfaces (planes extending in the left-right direction), until the straight line intersecting the inner rail 61 becomes the same as the length of the lower side surface of the specific winning opening 65a. It is necessary to raise the specific winning opening 65a from the lower edge of the inner rail 61 and arrange it. Therefore, the position of the specific winning opening 65a becomes high.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the lower side surface of the specific winning opening 65a is curved like the lower side surface of the inner rail 61, it is not necessary to raise the specific winning opening 65a and the specific winning opening 65a is placed in a low position. Can be placed in.

Further, since the upper side surface of the specific winning opening 65a is inclined downward as it approaches the left and right ends, the ball to the specific winning opening 65a is compared with the case where the upper side surface is formed by a plane extending in the left-right direction. The placement of the road nails that guide the vehicle can be lowered. As a result, the lower edge of the third symbol display device 81 can be lowered.

The out openings 314 are formed in pairs on the left and right sides of the opening upper portion 313, and the lower side of the out opening 314 is arranged below and the upper side of the out opening 314 is arranged above the left and right ends of the opening upper portion 313. To. That is, the opening upper portion 313 is formed below the out opening 314. As a result, the arrangement of the variable winning device 330, which will be described later, can be lowered, and the lower edge of the third symbol display device 81 can be lowered. Even with such an arrangement, in the present embodiment, a sphere is flowed down the upper surface of the moving upper lid member 332 which has an upper side surface having substantially the same shape as the shape of the opening upper portion 313 and is slid and moved in the front-rear direction. Is discharged to the out port 314 (see FIG. 17), so that the game can be continued.

The front plate member 320 is a plate-shaped member formed of a light-transmitting resin material, and is arranged on the front side of the front side unit 310 and is formed so that a sphere can flow down between the front plate member 320 and the main body plate portion 311. The plate-shaped main body plate portion 321 and the first winning opening front portion 322 which is arranged at the upper end of the main body plate portion 321 and guides the ball to the lower side 311a of the first winning opening, and is arranged below the electric accessory 640a. The electric accessory lower support portion 323 is provided, the out opening lower plate 324 arranged along the lower side surface of the out opening 314, and the main body plate portion 321 projecting from the main body plate portion 321 along the lower edge of the inner rail 61. It mainly includes a ball feed unit 325.

The main body plate portion 321 includes a ball sink rib 321a that is convexly provided on the back surface side in a rib shape on the outside of the out port lower plate 324. The ball sink rib 321a adjusts the flow direction of the ball rolling along the inner rail 61, and the details thereof will be described later in FIG.

The electric accessory lower support portion 323 includes a storage recess 323a which is a horizontally long recess, and the light irradiation device 311b is housed in the storage recess 323a.

The out port lower plate 324 is provided with thin ribs extending in the front-rear direction on the upper side surface in the left-right direction. Further, the out port lower plate 324 includes a step portion 324a projecting upward at the left and right inner end portions. The unevenness formed on the upper side surface of the out port lower plate 324 can decelerate the flowing ball. Further, the rib formed on the out opening lower plate 324 is formed so as to be inclined downward toward the back surface side. As a result, the speed at which the flowing ball is discharged to the out port 314 can be improved.

Since the inclined plate portion 312 described above is formed directly above the out-mouth lower plate 324 (see FIG. 17), a ball that falls after rolling the inclined plate portion 312 is directed toward the out-mouth lower plate 324. Falling is suppressed. That is, the ball that falls after rolling the inclined plate portion 312 falls inside the pair of out-port lower plates 324 in the left-right direction (position where the moving upper lid member 332 is arranged), or the out-port lower plate 324. It either falls to the outer end portion (near the ball sink rib 321a and at the boundary position between the rib formation range and the rail through which the ball flows). Both of these are outside the rib formation range. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball from falling onto the out-mouth lower plate 324 from a high place, and it is possible to improve the durability of the out-mouth lower plate 324.

The step portion 324a is a step formed between the out opening 314 and the specific winning opening 65a, and the ball flowing down from the left-right direction and flowing down the upper side surface of the out opening lower plate 324 exceeds the step portion 324a. It is prevented from flowing down to the central portion in the left-right direction (see FIG. 17). That is, the ball that flows down from the left-right direction and flows down the upper side surface of the out port lower plate 324 is exclusively guided to the out port 314.

The ball feeding portion 325 mainly includes a back side side surface 325a formed on the back side and left and right side side surfaces 325b connected to the back side side surface 325a and formed on the left and right sides.

The rear side surface 325a is inclined downward toward the back side, and the left and right side surfaces 325b are inclined toward the center toward the back side. As a result, the flow direction of the ball that has reached the ball feed portion 325 can be directed to the back side. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the ball from staying in front of the specific winning opening 65a and prevent so-called over winning.

Next, the variable winning device 330 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 to 15. 13 is a front exploded perspective view of the variable winning device 330, FIG. 14 is a rear exploded perspective view of the variable winning device 330, and FIG. 15A is a top view of the variable winning device 330. 15 (b) is a front view of the variable winning device 330, and FIG. 15 (c) is a side view of the variable winning device 330 in the direction of arrow XVc of FIG. 15 (b).

As shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, the variable winning device 330 includes a main body member 331 forming a skeleton and a movable upper lid member 332 which is inserted into the main body member 331 from the front and is formed so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction. A solenoid 333 that generates a driving force for sliding the moving upper lid member 332 and a lever member 334b that is swung by the solenoid 333 are housed and a rear lid member 334 that is fastened and fixed to the back side of the main body member 331. And mainly prepare.

The main body member 331 is arranged below the deformed through hole 331a through which the moving upper lid member 332 is inserted, the lower passage 331b through which the ball won in the specific winning opening 65a flows down, and the lower passage 331b, and is directed upward. It mainly includes a light irradiation device 331c that irradiates light with light, and a back side accommodating portion 331d that is a recess formed on the back side toward the front side and accommodates a solenoid 333, a lever member 334b, and the like. ..

As shown in FIGS. 15A and 15B, the modified through hole 331a is a through hole formed along the shape of the moving upper lid member 332, and is a front portion accommodating the front side plate portion 332a. It mainly includes an opening 331a1 and a rear opening 331a2 for accommodating the rear plate portion 332b.

The front opening 331a1 is a recess formed in a pentagonal shape in which the lower side extends horizontally in front view, the upper side is inclined upward as the upper side toward the center, and the left and right side sides extend vertically.

The rear opening 331a2 is an opening formed by cutting off the left and right portions of the front opening 331a1 from the rear central portion of the front opening 331a1. That is, the outer shapes of the lower and upper sides of the rear opening 331a2 and the outer shapes of the lower and upper sides of the front opening 331a do not form steps in the front-rear direction, but are formed at surface positions. As a result, the moving upper lid member 332 can be smoothly guided.

The lower passage 331b is a passage formed in pairs on the left and right so that the sphere can pass through (see FIG. 18A), and is formed so as to project downward from the lower edge of the inner rail 61, and the sphere is formed behind the lower passage 331b. A sensor S for detecting the passage of the sensor S is arranged (see FIG. 15B).

The light irradiation device 331c is a device that illuminates the lower passage 331b, the plate-shaped portion 332a1, and the like with light to produce an effect, and is arranged below the inner rail 61 (lower part of the receiving opening 60a). As a result, the devices required for the light irradiation device 331c can be arranged below the inner rail 61, so that a space on the back side of the game board 13 can be secured, and the third symbol display device 81 (FIG. The lower edge (see 2) can be lowered downward.

The light irradiation device 331c includes a light irradiation unit 331c1 that irradiates light. The light irradiation unit 331c1 is formed in pairs on the left and right directly below the lower passage 331b, and irradiates light upward.

The rear side accommodating portion 331d communicates with the front opening 331a1 with the rear opening 331a2 interposed therebetween.

The moving upper lid member 332 is a long member formed of a light-transmitting resin material, and includes a front side plate portion 332a housed in the front opening portion 331a1 and a rear side plate portion 332b housed in the rear opening portion 331a2. A central rib 332c projecting downward along the central axis of the front plate portion 332a and the rear plate portion 332b, and a connecting hole 332d bored in the rear end of the rear plate portion 332b in the vertical direction. Mainly prepare.

The front side plate portion 332a is formed in a plate-shaped portion 332a1 formed in a manner of ascending and tilting toward the central portion in the left-right direction along the shape of the upper side of the front opening portion 331a1, and is formed in the vertical direction of the plate-shaped portion 332a1. A lightening hole 332a2 and a guide rib 332a3 extending downward and extending in the front-rear direction at the left-right end of the plate-shaped portion 332a1 are mainly provided.

The plate-shaped portion 332a1 includes a front inclined side surface 332a1f formed so as to be inclined toward the back surface side toward the lower side (see FIG. 16) and recessed toward the back surface side toward the central portion in the left-right direction. Since the front inclined side surface 332a1f is formed so as to be recessed toward the back side toward the central portion in the left-right direction, the ball can flow toward the center side when the ball is sandwiched between the front plate member 320 and the front inclined side surface 332a1f. , It is possible to prevent the ball from interfering with the sliding operation of the moving upper lid member 332.

Since the front inclined side surface 332a1f is formed as a portion that reflects light as described later, in order to effectively reflect the light, a metal film may be formed on the front inclined side surface 332a1f or mirror-finished. You may. In this embodiment, a tape that reflects light is attached.

The guide rib 332a3 is formed along the left and right side surfaces of the front opening 331a1 in the assembled state (see FIG. 15), and is in contact with the lower side surface of the front opening 331a1. As a result, it is possible to suppress a displacement in the left-right direction when the moving upper lid member 332 is slid.

The central rib 332c is formed at the bent portion of the front side plate portion 332a formed by bending the plate shape. As a result, the rigidity of the front plate portion 332a can be improved. Further, when the moving upper lid member 332 is slid forward (when the moving upper lid member 332 of the variable winning device 330 is in the retracted state), it is fastened to the back side of the opening upper portion 313. As a result, it is possible to prevent the central rib 332c and the ball from colliding with each other and causing the moving upper lid member 332 to malfunction.

The connecting hole 332d is a through hole through which the connecting portion 334b4 of the lever member 334b is inserted and the displacement due to the swing of the lever member 334b is transmitted to the moving upper lid member 332 (see FIG. 16).

The solenoid 333 mainly includes a main body 333a that serves as a drive source, and a hook-shaped hook-shaped member 333b that is arranged below the main body 333a and is moved up and down below the lever member 334b.

The rear lid member 334 mainly includes a plate-shaped main body portion 334a and a lever member 334b which is pivotally supported by the main body portion 334a and whose tip is formed so as to be movable in the front-rear direction.

The lever member 334b includes a main body portion 334b1 extending in the vertical direction, a pair of shaft portions 334b2 projecting in a columnar shape in both left and right directions at the lower end portion of the main body portion 334b1 and pivotally supported by the main body portion 334a. At a lower claw portion 334b3 that extends below the main body portion 334b1 at a substantially intermediate position of the pair of shaft portions 334b2 and is formed so as to accommodate a hook-shaped member 333b between the main body portion 334b1 and the upper end portion of the main body portion 334b1. It mainly includes a connecting portion 334b4 formed by bulging into a columnar shape.

Next, the sliding movement of the moving upper lid member 332 will be described with reference to FIG. 16 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 330 in the XVIa-XVIa line of FIG. 15 (b), and FIG. 16 (b) is a slide movement of the moving upper lid member 332 from the state of FIG. 16 (a). It is sectional drawing of the variable winning apparatus 330 after making it. In addition, FIG. 16A shows a retracted state in which the moving upper lid member 332 is arranged rearward, and FIG. 16B shows an overhanging state in which the moving upper lid member 332 is arranged in the front, and light. In order to facilitate understanding of the path E1 of the above, the illustration of the central rib 332c is partially omitted. Further, in FIGS. 16A and 16B, the inner rail 61 and the front plate member 320 in the assembled state (see FIG. 2) are virtually illustrated by imaginary lines.

As shown in FIG. 16A, when the moving upper lid member 332 forms the retracted state, the hook-shaped member 333b is arranged upward and the lever member 334b is tilted backward. In this state, the ball can flow down in front of the variable winning device 330, that is, the ball can win a prize in the specific winning opening 65a (see FIGS. 10 and 17) (open state).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 16B, when the moving upper lid member 332 forms an overhanging state, the hook-shaped member 333b is pressed downward so that the lever member 334b is tilted forward about the shaft portion 334b2 and the back surface. The moving upper lid member 332 is slid and moved to the front side while being abutted against the side surface of the side accommodating portion 331b. In this state, the ball cannot win a prize (closed state) in the specific winning opening 65a (see FIGS. 10 and 17).

In this case, the rear side surface of the lower end portion of the hook-shaped member 333b is brought into contact with the end portion of the lower claw portion 334b3 of the lever member 334b in the front-rear direction, so that the swing of the lever member 334b is mechanically restricted. (The hook-shaped member 333b is arranged in the moving direction of the lower claw portion 334b3, and the moving direction of the lower claw portion 334b3 and the moving direction of the hook-shaped member 333b are orthogonal to each other). Therefore, the driving force of the solenoid 333 can be suppressed as compared with the case where the swing of the lever member 334b is stopped by the driving force of the solenoid 333.

Here, with reference to FIG. 16, the path of the light irradiated from the light irradiation device 331c will be described.

As shown in FIG. 16A, when the moving upper lid member 332 is in the retracted state, the light emitted upward from the light irradiation portion 331c1 reaches the front inclined side surface 332a1f of the plate-shaped portion 332a1 along the path E1. To do. At this time, since the front inclined side surface 332a1f is formed so as to be inclined toward the back side toward the downward side, the light irradiated from below and reaching the front side inclined side surface 332a1f is reflected toward the front (player side). In this case, the player can visually recognize the front inclined side surface 332a1f of the moving upper lid member 332 as if it is emitting light. Further, since the light reflected by the front inclined side surface 332a1f is projected into the light projection range E0 of the front plate member 320, the front plate member 320 can be attracted attention. Thereby, the directing ability of the moving upper lid member 332 and the front plate member 320 can be improved.

Here, when an LED or the like is arranged on the moving upper lid member 332 to cause the moving upper lid member 332 to emit light, the moving upper lid member 332 may become large. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the LED is not arranged on the moving upper lid member 332, the ability of the moving upper lid member 332 as an effect portion is improved while suppressing the increase in size of the moving upper lid member 332. Can be done.

As shown in FIG. 16B, when the moving upper lid member 332 is in the overhanging state, the light is emitted upward from the light irradiation unit 331c1 along the path E2, and the light directed to the front inclined side surface 332a1f is the inner rail 61. It does not reach the front inclined side surface 332a1f of the plate-shaped portion 332a1 because it is shielded by. In this case, the light emitted from the light irradiation unit 331c1 along the path E1 reaches the intermediate position of the plate-shaped portion 332a1 of the front side plate portion 332a and only transmits as it is, so that the front inclined side surface 332a1f and the front plate member 320 Is darkly visible to the player.

That is, depending on whether the moving upper lid member 332 is in the retracted state or the overhanging state, whether or not the light emitted from the light irradiating portion 331c1 reaches the front inclined side surface 332a1f changes, and the front plate Whether or not the light projection range E0 of the member 320 is brightly visible changes. Therefore, by checking the brightness state of the front inclined side surface 332a1f and the light projection range E0 of the front plate member 320, it is possible to confirm whether or not the ball can be won in the specific winning opening 65a.

Therefore, as in the present embodiment, since the moving upper lid member 332 slides back and forth, it is difficult to grasp the change in the state of the moving upper lid member 332 from the front view (FIGS. 17A and 17B). ), It is possible to easily confirm whether or not a ball can be won in the specific winning opening 65a by changing the brightness of the light projection range E0.

Here, the moving upper lid member 332 has an operation necessary for forming a closed state that prevents the ball from passing through the specific winning opening 65a and an open state that allows the ball to pass through the specific winning opening 65a ( The state of brightness in the light projection range E0 is changed only by moving the light back and forth. In other words, since the state of the light projection range E0 is changed only by the operation required for the moving upper lid member 332 to continue the game, no additional mechanism is required. That is, the moving upper lid member 332 can be used for both the purpose of switching whether or not the ball can pass through the specific winning opening 65a and the purpose of producing an effect by the light emitted from the light irradiation unit 331c1.

By crossing the path E1 when the sphere passes through the lower passage 331b, the light emitted from the light irradiation unit 331c may be reflected by the sphere to produce an effect. In this case, the vicinity of the inner rail 61 (below the light projection range E0 in FIGS. 16A and 17B) can be brightly illuminated in front view.

With reference to FIG. 17, the flow of the sphere will be described when the moving upper lid member 332 forms the overhanging state and when the moving upper lid member 332 forms the retracted state. 17 (a) and 17 (b) are partial front views of the game board 13. In addition, in FIG. 17A, the case where the moving upper lid member 332 forms the overhanging state (see FIG. 16B) is shown, and in FIG. 17B, the moving upper lid member 332 is in the retracted state (FIG. 16). The case of forming (see (a)) is illustrated, and in FIGS. 17 (a) and 17 (b), the main body plate portion 321 of the front plate member 320 is illustrated by an imaginary line. In addition, in FIGS. 17A and 17B, whether or not the moving upper lid member 332 is overhanging is shown by the presence or absence of shading. That is, in FIGS. 17 (a) and 17 (b), the portion where the shading is formed is in contact with the front plate member 320 or blocks the passage of the sphere from the front plate member 320. It is a part close to the member 320.

In the state shown in FIG. 17A, the ball falling in the path C2 flows down along the upper side surface of the moving upper lid member 332 and is discharged to the out port 314. In this case, the weight of the ball may cause the moving upper lid member 332 to fall down, and when the left and right ends of the moving upper lid member 332 are moved below the step portion 324a, the ball is discharged to the out port 314. It becomes impossible and interferes with the game.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the moving upper lid member 332 has a length several times as long as the length overhanging the front side of the deformed through hole 331a (about four times as long, see FIG. 16B). It is accommodated in the deformed through hole 331a and is formed so as to be in contact with the side surface of the deformed through hole 331a in the vertical direction over the front-rear direction of the variable winning device 330. Therefore, by reducing the clearance between the moving upper lid member 332 and the deformed through hole 331a, it is possible to prevent the moving upper lid member 332 from falling down due to the weight of the ball colliding with the moving upper lid member 332. As a result, the left and right end portions of the moving upper lid member 332 can be formed at the surface position with the step portion 324a, and the road nail to the specific winning opening 65a can be lowered downward, so that the lower part of the third symbol display device 81 can be formed. The rim can be lowered downwards.

As shown in FIG. 17B, when the moving upper lid member 332 forms a retracted state, the ball can flow down toward the specific winning opening 65a. At this time, the ball that rolls on the path C1 from the left and right along the inner rail 61 collides with the step portion 324a and is discharged to the out opening 314, so that the ball falls on the path C2 from above toward the specific winning opening 65a. Rolls on the inner rail 61 and reaches the specific winning opening 65a.

Here, in the present embodiment, the vertical width of the left and right end portions of the specific winning opening 65a is formed to be equal to or less than the diameter of the sphere. That is, the vertical distance from the inner rail 61 at the left and right ends of the moving upper lid member 332 is formed to be equal to or less than the diameter of the sphere. Therefore, the height of the step portion 324a from the inner rail 61 can be lowered, and the arrangement of the out port 314 to which the ball falling from the step portion 324a reaches can also be lowered.

Further, in this case, it becomes difficult for the ball to enter from the left and right ends of the specific winning opening 65a (in addition, in the present embodiment, the entry of the ball is blocked by the base plate 60). However, since the lower side of the specific winning opening 65a is formed along the inner rail 61, the ball flowing down to the front side of the left and right ends of the specific winning opening 65a rolls toward the center of the game area along the inner rail 61 due to gravity. It is moved and enters the specific winning opening 65a from there. Since the lower edge of the inner rail 61 is formed so as to be inclined rearward (see FIG. 16), the ball can smoothly enter the specific winning opening 65a (see FIG. 17).

As a result, the moving upper lid member 332 forming the upper side of the specific winning opening 65a is separated upward from the inner rail 61 by the diameter of the sphere or more at least near the center of the game area (near where the inner rail 61 is arranged at the lowest position). Therefore, the arrangement position of the moving upper lid member 332 can be lowered downward. Therefore, the arrangement position of the variable winning device 330 can be lowered as compared with the case where it is necessary to separate the inner rail 61 upward from the inner rail 61 by a diameter larger than the diameter of the sphere at a position other than the vicinity of the center of the inner rail 61. As a result, a space on the back side of the game board 13 can be secured, and the lower edge of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) can be lowered downward.

Next, with reference to FIG. 18, it will be described that the light is collected by the functions of the ball sink ribs 311c and 321a and the ball feed portion 325 and the front inclined side surface 332a1f. 18 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the lower board unit 300 in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (b), and FIG. 18 (b) is a lower board unit 300 in line XVIIIb-XVIIIb of FIG. 17 (a). 18 (c) is a cross-sectional view of the board surface lower unit 300 in which the arrangement of the light irradiation unit 331c1 is virtually changed from FIG. 18 (b).

In FIG. 18A, the rolling path of the sphere is described by the paths C1a, C1b, and C2a, and the moving upper lid member 332 in the retracted state is illustrated by an imaginary line. The moving upper lid member 332 is located on the front side (upper side of FIG. 17B) with respect to the cross section of FIG. 18A and is not actually visible, but for convenience of explanation, it is viewed in the vertical direction (paper surface of FIG. 18). It is illustrated by an imaginary line in FIG. 18 (a) in a state where the positions (vertical view) match. Further, in FIGS. 18 (b) and 18 (c), three spheres flowing down the lower passage 331b are virtually illustrated.

The path of the ball that is rolled from the left-right direction along the inner rail 61 (see FIG. 11) and discharged to the out port 314 will be described. As shown in FIG. 18A, the sphere that rolls from the left-right direction toward the center of FIG. 18A abuts on at least one of the ball sink rib 311c or the ball sink rib 321a. That is, the ball that rolls while contacting the main body plate portion 311 of the front unit 310 abuts on the ball sink rib 311c, and the ball that rolls while contacting the main body plate portion 321 of the front plate member 320 is a ball sink rib. It comes into contact with 321a.

Here, when the ball comes into contact with the ball sink rib 311c, the velocity direction of the ball is directed in the direction along the path C1a, and then the ball comes into contact with the ball sink rib 321a. Therefore, regardless of whether the ball rolls while contacting the main body plate portion 311 of the front unit 310 or while contacting the main body plate portion 321 of the front plate member 320, the rolling ball is lengthened. It can be brought into contact with the rib 321a.

By bringing the ball rolling along the inner rail 61 (see FIG. 11) into contact with the ball flow rib 321a, the velocity direction of the ball can be directed in the direction along the path C1b. In this case, the velocity of the ball can be directed to the back side (upper side in FIG. 18A) before the ball is arranged on the front side of the out port 314. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the period from when the ball is arranged on the front side of the out port 314 until the ball is discharged from the game area, and it is possible to suppress the ball from staying on the front side of the out port 314. At the same time, the opening width of the out port 314 can be suppressed. As a result, when the specific winning opening 65a (see FIG. 10) and the out opening 314 are arranged side by side, the arrangement of the specific winning opening 65a can be lowered below the game area.

A case where the spheres fall between the stepped portions 324a arranged in parallel on the left and right sides will be described. In this case, the ball that has fallen between the step portions 324a rolls toward the center in the left-right direction, and the ball comes into contact with the left-right side surface 325b of the ball feed portion 325, so that the velocity direction of the sphere is along the path C2a. Change. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball from staying on the front side of the specific winning opening 65a (see FIG. 10), so that over-winning can be suppressed.

When the sphere flows down along the lower passage 331b and crosses the light emitted from the light irradiation unit 331c1, the sphere shields the light so that the light does not reach the front inclined side surface 332a1f. Therefore, it is possible to confirm whether or not the ball has won the specific winning opening 65a (see FIG. 17) depending on whether the light projection range E0 of the front inclined side surface 332a1f or the front plate member 320 is visually recognized brightly or darkly. it can.

As a result, as in the present embodiment, the front plate member 320 formed of a light-transmitting resin material is arranged in front of the specific winning opening 65a, and the inside of the specific winning opening 65a is difficult to see. Also, it can be confirmed that the ball has entered the specific winning opening 65a due to the change in the brightness of the light projection range E0. Therefore, it is not necessary to remove the specific winning opening 65a from diagonally above in order to confirm that the ball enters the specific winning opening 65a, and the burden on the player can be eased.

In the present embodiment, the irradiation direction of the light emitted from the light irradiation unit 331c1 and the flow direction of the sphere flowing down the lower passage 331b intersect at an angle close to a right angle (see FIG. 18B). Therefore, the ball enters the specific winning opening 65a as compared with the case where the ball flows down in the direction of the light traveling (see FIG. 18C) and the case where the ball flows down along the light irradiation direction. The period during which the sphere flowing down the lower passage 331b blocks the light can be shortened. In other words, it is possible to prolong the period during which the light projection range E0 of the front inclined side surface 332a1f and the front plate member 320 is brightly visible, and it is possible to secure the directing ability of the front inclined side surface 332a1f and the front plate member 320.

As shown in FIG. 18B, when the light path E1 and the flow direction of the sphere flowing down the lower passage 331b intersect (cross) at an angle close to a right angle, the light path E1 is blocked by the sphere. Later, around the point where the sphere passes the front end of the lower passage 331b (right side of FIG. 18B), the light is not blocked by the sphere (the light reaches the front inclined side surface 332a1f).

In this case, even if the spheres flow down the lower passage 331b in a row, the path E1 is shielded for each sphere, so that the change in the brightness of the front inclined side surface 332a1f and the light projection range E0 of the front plate member 320 can be changed. By checking, the number of balls that have entered the specific winning opening 65a can be confirmed.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 18C, when the light path E3 and the flow direction of the sphere flowing down the lower passage 331b are close to parallel, after the light path E3 is blocked by the sphere, When the sphere reaches the rear end of the lower passage 331b (left side of FIG. 18C, near the sensor S) and falls downward, the light is not blocked by the sphere (so that the light reaches the front inclined side surface 332a1f). Become). That is, until then, the light path E3 remains blocked by the sphere.

In this case, when the spheres flow down the lower passage 331b in a row, the light path E3 is blocked by the first sphere (the sphere on the left side of FIG. 18C) as long as the spheres are arranged in the lower passage 331b. Further, after the first ball falls downward from the rear end of the lower passage 331b (left side in FIG. 18 (c)), the light path to the second ball (ball on the right side in FIG. 18 (c)). E3 is blocked. Moreover, when the second ball falls from the rear end of the lower passage 331b, if the next ball (third ball) enters the lower passage 331b, the path of light to the ball. E3 is blocked. In this way, the sphere continues to block the light path E3 and is always visible dark while the sphere is flowing down the lower passage 331b. That is, the number of times the light is visually recognized brightly or darkly is not always the same as the number of balls that have entered the specific winning opening 65a, and the number of balls that have entered the specific winning opening 65a is the same. Confirmation becomes difficult. On the other hand, the present embodiment has the above-mentioned advantages.

As shown in FIG. 18A, since the front inclined side surface 332a1f is formed to be recessed toward the back side toward the central portion in the left-right direction, the light emitted from the pair of left and right light irradiating portions 331c1 is formed on the front inclined side surface 332a1f. By being reflected, the light is focused on the center of the front plate member 320 along the path E1 and reaches the light projection range E0 (see FIG. 17B).

Here, in the present embodiment, since the front plate member 320 is arranged on the front side of the moving upper lid member 332, the specific winning opening 65a can be hidden, while the front inclined side surface 332a1f is visually recognized through the front plate member 320. Therefore, it may be difficult to grasp the change in the brightness of the front inclined side surface 332a1f. In that case, it is necessary to increase the light intensity of a light emitting element such as an LED used for the light irradiation unit 331c1, and there is a problem that the light emitting element that can be used for the light irradiation unit 331c1 is limited.

On the other hand, since the front inclined side surface 332a1f collects the light emitted from the light irradiation unit 331c1 toward the center of the front plate member 320, the light emitted from the pair of light irradiation units 331c1 is overlapped with each other. It is possible to improve the intensity of light visually recognized in the light projection range E0. Therefore, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in selecting a light emitting element that can be used for the light irradiation unit 331c1 (it is possible to select a light emitting element having a weak light intensity).

Further, since the light emitted from the pair of light irradiation units 331c1 is partially overlapped and visually recognized in the front view (see FIG. 17B), the pair of light irradiation is performed by making the colors of the light different from each other. A total of three colors of light, that is, the color of the light emitted from the unit 331c1 and the color in which they are combined, can be visually recognized in the projection range E0 (see FIG. 17B).

Here, since the light emitted from each of the pair of light irradiation units 331c1 is shielded by the spheres that independently roll along the path C2a (see FIG. 18), the timing at which the spheres shield the light is set. The color of the light visually recognized in the projection range E0 can be switched in various ways.

For example, in FIG. 18, consider a case where the light irradiation unit 331c1 on the right side irradiates a "blue" color light and the light irradiation unit 331c1 on the left side irradiates a "red" color light. In this case, when the moving upper lid member 332 is in the retracted state, light is emitted in the order of "blue", "purple (overlapping part)", and "red" in the light projection range E0 (see FIG. 17B) from the right side. Is visually recognized.

In this case, if the sphere rolls on the path C2a on the right side of FIG. 18 to block the light emitted from the light irradiation unit 331c1, the "blue" color light is blocked, so that the light projection range E0 Only "red" light is visible in.

On the other hand, when the sphere rolls on the path C2a on the left side of FIG. 18 to block the light emitted from the light irradiation unit 331c1, the "red" color light is blocked, so that the light projection range E0 is set. Only "blue" light is visible.

In this way, the mode of light visually recognized in the light projection range E0 can be changed depending on which path the sphere rolls and which light irradiation unit 331c1 blocks the light. Since this change in the light mode is caused by a sphere that flows down the game area in a random path while colliding with a nail or the like, the change in the light mode can be caused at a random timing. That is, as compared with the case where the mode of the light emitted from the light irradiation unit 331c1 is changed by electronic control, it is possible to perform an effect rich in randomness, and it is possible to improve the effect.

In the present embodiment, the front inclined side surface 332a1f is formed in a dogleg shape when viewed from above, but from the viewpoint of condensing light, it may be formed in a parabolic shape when viewed from above.

Next, the combined operation unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 to 37.

FIG. 19 is a front perspective view of the composite operation unit 400, and FIG. 20 is a rear perspective view of the composite operation unit 400. Note that FIGS. 19 and 20 show a state in which the main body member 410 of the composite operation unit 400 is arranged at the retracted position, and the drive motor 462 and the fixing plate 461 are not shown. In the composite operation unit 400, the guide member 450 and the rear upper plate 470 are fastened and fixed to the bottom wall portion 211 (see FIG. 6) of the rear case 210.

FIG. 21 is a front exploded perspective view of the composite operation unit 400, and FIG. 22 is a rear exploded perspective view of the composite operation unit 400. As shown in FIGS. 21 and 22, the composite operation unit 400 has a horizontally long rectangular main body member 410 that can be slid and moved in the vertical direction, and one end thereof can be guided to the left and right ends of the main body member 410. A pair of members to be connected, a shielding member 420 whose other end is pivotally supported by each other, a swinging member 430 swayablely arranged on the central front side of the main body member 410, and a main body member 410. A pair of leg members 440 are fastened and fixed at both ends and extended in the vertical direction, a guide member 450 in which a guide hole 452 for guiding the leg member 440 is formed, and a driving force required for moving the leg member 440. Wiring guide that connects the drive device 460 to be generated, the rear upper plate 470 that is fastened and fixed above the opening 211a of the rear case 210, and the rear upper plate 470 and the main body member 410, and the wiring is housed inside. It is mainly composed of an arm 480.

FIG. 23 is a front exploded perspective view of the main body member 410, the shielding member 420, and the swing member 430, and FIG. 24 is a rear exploded perspective view of the main body member 410, the shielding member 420, and the swing member 430.

As shown in FIGS. 23 and 24, the main body member 410 is formed in a plate-shaped base member 411 formed elongated in the left-right direction and both left and right ends of the base member 411 in the front-rear direction and vertically. The elongated leg insertion hole 412 and the direction in which the base member 411 is arranged inside the leg insertion hole 412 in the left-right direction and is bored in the front-rear direction and ascends and inclines toward the left-right central axis of the base member 411. A long-hole-shaped guide hole 413 extending to the base member 411 and a columnar member extending from the upper end of the base member 411 to the front side, and one end of the wiring guide arm 480 is pivotally supported. An arm shaft support 414, a holding portion 415 extending upward from the center of the base member 411 in the left-right direction and having a hook-shaped tip, and a swinging member 430 arranged in pairs at the lower end of the base member 411. The shaft support portion 416 that pivotally supports the shaft support hole 431a and the photo sensor 417 that is arranged in front of the base member 411 and detects the sensor passing portion 435d of the swing member 430 are formed in a substantially semicircular shape in the front view. Mainly includes a decorative plate portion 418.

The base member 411 has a shape in which the central portion in the left-right direction hangs downward from both the left and right end portions. As a result, a space can be formed above the central portion in the left-right direction, and the wiring guide arm 480 can be arranged in the space (see FIG. 29).

The leg insertion hole 412 is formed in an elongated shape, and by inserting the connecting fixing portion 442 (see FIG. 21) of the leg member 440, the leg member 440 is prevented from rotating with respect to the base member 411. To. As a result, the postures of the leg member 440 and the main body member 410 can be stabilized.

The guide hole 413 is an elongated hole through which the insertion shaft portion 421c of the shielding member 420 is inserted and is slidably moved, and is formed with a width slightly larger than the diameter of the insertion shaft portion 421c. On the upper side of the guide hole 413, a front lid 413a that covers the front side of the leg insertion hole 412 and has a side surface facing the guide hole 413 formed along the upper side of the guide hole 413 is arranged and below the guide hole 413. On the side, a support plate 413b, which is a plate-shaped portion projecting from the front side of the base member 411 and is inclined upward along the guide hole 413, is arranged.

The front end of the support plate 413b is in contact with the back surface of the swing base member 421. As a result, the back-and-forth swing of the swing base member 421 is suppressed by the support plate 413b, so that the posture of the shielding member 420 during movement can be stabilized.

The arm shaft support portion 414 is arranged on the left side in the front view from the central portion of the base member 411, and more specifically, is arranged at an intermediate portion between the portion where the upper end portion of the base member 411 starts to hang down and the central portion in the left-right direction. Will be done. The end (lower end) of the third guide arm 483 (see FIG. 21) of the wiring guide arm 480 is pivotally supported on the arm shaft support 414, and a collar member is attached to the tip of the arm shaft support 414. Fastened and fixed.

The holding portion 415 is a portion that is hooked on the slide lever 473 (see FIG. 21) arranged on the rear upper plate 470. That is, in a state where the main body member 410 is arranged in the retracted position (see FIG. 29), the upper end portion of the slide lever 473 and the lower end portion of the hook-shaped portion of the holding portion 415 are brought into contact with each other. The downward movement of the main body member 410 is restricted. An inclined surface 415a is formed on the upper surface of the hook-shaped tip portion. The inclined surface 415a does not hinder the movement of the main body member 410 even when the main body member 410 is moved to the retracted position while the slide lever 473 is still overhanging.

The decorative plate portion 418 is a decorative portion that can be visually recognized together with the shielding member 420 when the main body member 410 is arranged at the overhanging position, and the main body member 410 is arranged at the retracted position (FIG. FIG. 29), which is a portion that comes into contact with the lower surface of the contact plate 421d.

The shielding member 420 is a decorative member in which a swing base member 421 formed in such a manner that the ends of a pair of plate-shaped members are coaxially supported, and an upper end portion is fastened and fixed to the front side of the swing base member 421. 422, a pair of connecting members 423 whose one end is coaxially supported by the shaft support position of the swing base member 421, and a guide whose other end of the connecting member 423 is pivotally supported. It mainly includes a guide plate 424 in which the hole 424b is formed and fastened and fixed to the upper end portion on the front side of the back case 210.

The swing base member 421 is a swing shaft formed of a pair of plate-shaped members 421a formed in a substantially arc shape and coaxially supported with a shaft support hole 423d formed at one end of the connecting member 423. It mainly includes a hole 421b, a pair of left and right insertion shaft portions 421c that are inserted and guided through the guide hole 413 of the main body member 410, and a contact plate 421d that protrudes to the back side and comes into contact with the upper surface of the main body member 410. ..

The swing shaft hole 421b is a portion that is hung and supported by the connecting member 423 through which a shaft support rod 423c inserted through one end of the connecting member 423 is penetrated and serves as a swing shaft of the pair of plate-shaped members 421a. Is.

Since the insertion shaft portion 421c is inserted into the guide hole 413 of the main body member 410, the left and right end portions of the shielding member 420 are moved downward from the intermediate position (see FIG. 30) as the main body member 410 is moved downward. It is moved close to the center in the left-right direction.

The abutting plate 421d is a curved surface protruding from the plate-shaped member 421a to the back surface side, and is formed along the shape of the upper surface of the decorative plate portion 418. As a result, the upper surface of the main body member 410 and the lower surface of the contact plate 421d are brought into contact with each other at the retracted position.

The decorative member 422 has a pair of wide and thick portions 422a arranged on the front side of the swing base member 421, and a portion formed below the swing base member 421 in the front view, and the lower end portion thereof. It includes a hanging portion 422b formed by being curved rearward from the swing base member 421.

The hanging portion 422b is arranged closer to the main body member 410 than the swing base member 421.

The connecting member 423 is formed of a pair of rod members 423a that are bent in a frontal view at the bent portion 423b, includes a shaft support rod 423c, and has a shaft support rod 423c at one end of the rod member 423a. A shaft support hole 423d through which the rod member is inserted is formed, and a slide shaft portion 423e which is inserted and guided through the guide hole 424b of the guide plate 424 is formed at the other end of the rod member 423a.

The bent portion 423b is bent above the straight line connecting the shaft support hole 423d and the slide shaft portion 423e. That is, the bent portion 423b is arranged so as to be separated from the swing base member 421 than the straight line connecting the shaft support hole 423d and the slide shaft portion 423e. Therefore, a large space can be secured between the swing base member 421 and the connecting member 423, and the degree of freedom in designing the swing base member 421 can be improved.

The slide shaft portion 423e is formed of a cylindrical portion inserted into the guide hole 424b and a disk-shaped collar member fastened and fixed to the tip of the cylindrical portion.

The guide plate 424 includes a base plate 424a that is fastened and fixed to the back case 210, and a guide hole 424b that is a pair of elongated holes that are bored in the front-rear direction and extended in the left-right direction at both left and right ends of the base plate 424a. , Is mainly provided. A pair of guide holes 424b are formed at the same height.

The guide hole 424b is formed in the left-right direction, that is, in the direction along the upper outer edge of the opening 211a of the rear case 210. Therefore, the width required for the guide plate 424 for guiding the connecting member 423 can be suppressed. In this case, since the guide plate 424 can be arranged at a position farther from the third symbol display device 81, the shielding member 420 can be formed to be larger by that amount.

The swing member 430 is a member that is swingably supported by the shaft support portion 416, and is a main body member 431 that swings and a base that projects from the front side of the central portion of the base member 411. The member 432, the drive motor 433 that is fastened and fixed to the base member 432 to generate the driving force for driving the main body member 431, the drive gear 434 pivotally supported by the drive motor 433, and the drive gear 434 are meshed with each other. A transmission gear 435 that is pivotally supported above the base member 432 with respect to the drive gear 434, and a connecting member 436 that connects the connecting shaft 435c of the transmission gear 435 and the connecting shaft 431b of the main body member 431 are mainly used. Prepare for.

The main body member 431 is a member in which a hemispherical decorative portion is formed on the front side, and is formed in the left-right direction below both ends in the left-right direction on the back side, and has a shaft support hole 431a through which the shaft support portion 416 is inserted, and a back surface. Mainly includes a connecting shaft 431b which is arranged in the central portion on the side and is axially supported by one end of the connecting member 436.

The connecting shaft 431b is arranged on the back surface side of the main body member 431 at a position closer to the shaft support hole 431a than the end on the opposite side (upper side) of the shaft support hole 431a. As a result, the moving width of the upper end portion of the main body member 431 can be increased as compared with the moving width in which the connecting member 436 is actually moved back and forth.

The transmission gear 435 extends to the opposite side of the main body 435a, which is pivotally supported by the base member 432 and meshes with the drive gear 434 over a substantially half circumference, and the gear formed on the main body 435a. Formed along the overhanging portion 435b, the columnar connecting shaft 435c projecting from the overhanging tip portion of the overhanging portion 435b to the right in the front view, and the front left side surface of the overhanging portion 435b. It is mainly provided with a sensor passing portion 435d (see FIG. 34), which is formed in a fan shape in a left-right direction and whose peripheral edge passes through the photosensor 417.

The connecting member 436 is a rod-shaped member having holes parallel to each other at both ends, and has a one-sided connecting hole 436a formed at one end and pivotally supported by the connecting shaft 431b of the main body member 431. The other side connecting hole 436b, which is formed at the other end and is pivotally supported by the connecting shaft 435c of the transmission gear 435, is mainly provided.

A description will be given by returning to FIGS. 21 and 22. The arm member 440 has a long plate-shaped main body 441 in which a pair extends in the vertical direction, and a long hole shape in which a cross section projecting from the upper end of the main body 441 to the front side is long in the vertical direction. A pair of insertion shafts 443 that project from the upper and lower ends of the main body 441 to the back side and are inserted into the guide holes 452 of the guide member 450, and a front side from the lower end of the main body 441. The locking portion 444, which is projected to and locks one end of the urging spring 445, and the other end of the urging spring 445, which is locked at one end to the locking portion 444, are locked and the rear case 210. It mainly includes a holding and fixing portion 446 that is fastened and fixed to the front side.

A rack gear 441a is engraved on the side surface of the main body portion 441 on the side facing the main body member 410, and the rack gear 441a is meshed with the drive gear 463 of the drive device 460 to generate a drive device 460. The force is transmitted to the leg member 440.

The insertion shaft portion 443 is formed in a vertically long elongated hole shape and is inserted into the guide hole 452 of the guide member 450 extending vertically, so that the posture of the leg member 440 with respect to the guide member 450 is stabilized. Can be done. Further, since the insertion shaft portion 443 is formed in a pair of upper and lower parts, the posture of the leg member 440 with respect to the guide member 450 can be stabilized.

The urging spring 445 generates an urging force that moves the leg member 440 toward the retracted position (see FIG. 19). At this time, the other end of the urging spring 445 acts as a fixed side end portion locked to the holding and fixing portion 446, and one end acts as a moving side end portion locked to the locking portion 444.

The guide member 450 has a main body member 451 which is a long plate member in the vertical direction arranged in pairs on the left and right, and a long hole shape which is bored in the main body member 451 in the vertical direction and extended in the vertical direction. Guide hole 452, a pair of fixing portions 453 for fixing the drive device 460 in the central portion in the vertical direction of the main body member 451, and the leg member 440 are arranged on the front side of the upper end portion of the main body member 451 and the leg member 440 is retracted. A cover member 454 arranged on the front side of the leg member 440 in the state of being arranged in FIG. 19) is mainly provided.

The drive device 460 has a shape in which the side close to the main body member 410 is lowered one step rearward, the side close to the main body member 410 is fixed to the fixing portion 453 of the guide member 450, and the opposite side is the fastening portion 212b of the rear case 210 ( A fixing plate 461 fixed to the fixing plate 461), a drive motor 462 fastened and fixed to the fixing plate 461, and a drive gear 463 pivotally supported by the drive motor 462 are mainly provided.

Since the fixing plate 461 has a shape in which the side separated from the main body member 410 is raised one step to the front side, a gap surrounded by the back case 210 and the fixing plate 461 can be formed on the side separated from the main body member 410. it can. Here, when the urging springs 445 are arranged on the left and right sides of the leg member 440, the arrangement width of the leg member 440 including the urging spring 4454 in the left-right direction becomes large, and thereby the left-right width of the opening 211a becomes small. Was there. In the present embodiment, the urging spring 445 can be arranged in the gap (formed on the front side of the leg member 440) surrounded by the back case 210 and the fixing plate 461, and the left and right sides of the leg member 440 can be arranged accordingly. The space in the direction can be suppressed.

The rear upper plate 470 is a member that is fastened and fixed to the bottom wall portion 211 (see FIG. 6) formed above the opening 211a of the rear case 210, and is a plate-shaped main body portion 471 and the main body portion 471 thereof. A columnar shaft support 472 projecting from the upper left end of the front view to the front side, a horizontally long slide lever 473 arranged in the center of the main body 471, and the slide lever 473 in the left-right direction. It mainly includes a solenoid 474 that generates a driving force that is moved to the main body, and a front cover 475 that is fastened and fixed to the main body 471 so as to cover the front side of the slide lever 473.

The shaft support portion 472 is a portion where the one-side tubular portion 481b (see FIG. 25) of the wiring guide arm 480 is pivotally supported, and the collar member C is fastened and fixed to the tip end. The wiring introduced into the main body member 410 is arranged through the vicinity of the shaft support portion 472.

The slide lever 473 is a member that is in contact with the lower surface of the holding portion 415 of the main body member 410 in a state where the main body member 410 is arranged in the retracted position (see FIG. 29) to prevent the main body member 410 from moving downward. is there. An inclined surface 473a is formed on the lower surface of the tip of the slide lever 473. When the inclined surface 473a and the inclined surface 415a of the main body member 410 come into contact with each other, it is possible to suppress resistance generated between the inclined surfaces.

The extension allowance of the slide lever 473 is changed depending on whether or not electricity is conducted to the solenoid 474. For example, when the slide lever 473 projects to the left in the front view due to the conduction of electricity, the slide lever 473 abuts on the lower surface of the holding portion 415 if the electricity is conducting, and the main body member 410 Is prevented from moving downward (see FIG. 29). On the other hand, if electricity is not conducted, the slide lever 473 and the holding portion 415 are not brought into contact with each other, and the main body member 410 can move downward.

Here, it is conceivable that the solenoid 474 is driven as the main body member 410 is arranged at the retracted position, and the slide lever 473 is brought into contact with the holding portion 415. However, in this case, the driving force from the driving device 460 cannot be released from the time when the main body member 410 is arranged in the retracted position until the solenoid 474 moves the slide lever 473. Therefore, when detecting the arrangement of the main body member 410 and changing the operation of the drive device 460, it is necessary to control the drive device 460 in consideration of the time for the solenoid 474 to move the slide lever 473, which is difficult to control. It becomes.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the inclined surface 415a of the holding portion 415 is arranged to face the inclined surface 473a of the slide lever 473 by moving the main body member 410 upward while the slide lever 473 is overhanging (FIG. 31). (See), and eventually the slide lever 473 is pushed back. When the main body member 410 is arranged in the retracted position and the contact between the holding portion 415 and the slide lever 473 in the longitudinal direction of the slide lever 473 is released, the slide lever 473 is projected again and the lower surface of the holding portion 415 and the slide lever are released. It comes into contact with the upper surface of 473 (see FIG. 29). As a result, regardless of the arrangement of the main body member 410, by keeping the slide lever in the overhanging state, it is possible to prevent the main body member 410 from moving downward after being moved to the retracted position. Therefore, the control of the drive device 460 becomes easy.

The front cover 475 is a member in which a slide groove 475a, which is a concave groove for guiding the slide lever 473, is formed on the back surface in the left-right direction, and the slide lever 473 slides by the slide groove 475a of the front cover 475. It is possible to prevent the position from shifting in the vertical direction during movement.

The wiring guide arm 480 is a movable mechanism portion that guides the wiring W from the rear upper plate 470 to the main body member 410, which is formed of a resin material and is fastened and fixed to the back case 210, and is attached to one end in order from the top. A first guide arm 481 whose one-side tubular portion 481b is pivotally supported by a shaft support portion 472, and a second guide arm 482 that pivotally supports the other end of the first guide arm 481 with one end. And a third guide arm 483 in which the other end of the second guide arm 482 is pivotally supported by one end and the other end is pivotally supported by the arm shaft support 414.

Here, the wiring W is an electrical wiring (for example, a flat harness) formed in a band shape (formed wide in the vertical direction of FIG. 27). The length of the second guide arm 482 in the longitudinal direction is shorter than that of the first guide arm 481 by the diameter of the collar member C or more, and the length of the third guide arm 483 is shorter than that of the second guide arm 482 in the longitudinal direction. Is formed to be shorter than the diameter of the collar member C.

The wiring guide arm 480 is configured to accommodate the wiring W inside, and is a member for preventing the wiring W from breaking and breaking. As a result, it is not necessary to dispose the wiring W introduced into the main body member 410 through the leg member 440, and the space for arranging the leg member 440 can be suppressed. Therefore, the opening 211a can be expanded in the left-right direction.

Next, the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482 will be described with reference to FIGS. 25 to 27. Since the third guide arm 483 includes the ones described in the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482 as a technical idea, the description thereof will be omitted here.

25 (a) is a front view of the first guide arm 481, FIG. 25 (b) is a bottom view of the first guide arm 481, and FIG. 25 (c) is a view of XXVc of FIG. 25 (a). FIG. 25 (d) is a cross-sectional view of the first guide arm 481 in the line XXVc, and FIG. 25 (d) is a cross-sectional view of the first guide arm 481 in the line XXVd-XXVd of FIG. 25 (a).

As shown in FIGS. 25 (a) to 25 (d), the first guide arm 481 has a plate-shaped arm portion 481a formed in a long plate shape and the left end of the plate-shaped arm portion 481a in a front view. In the portion, the shaft is arranged on the vertical line of the lower bottom surface (lower side surface in FIG. 25 (a)) of the plate-shaped arm portion 481a, and the one-sided tubular portion 481b extending in the front-rear direction and the plate-shaped arm portion Among the ends of 481a, the shaft is arranged on the vertical line of the lower bottom surface of the plate-shaped arm 481a at the opposite end of the one-side tubular portion 481b, and the other-side tubular portion extends in the front-rear direction. The 481c, the attachment portion 481d formed in a plate shape above the plate-shaped arm portion 481a at a predetermined interval, the bottom portion 481e connecting the plate-shaped arm portion 481a and the back surface side of the attachment portion 481d, and the attachment portion 481d. It mainly includes a front locking portion 481f extending from the front side surface toward the plate-shaped arm portion 481a.

The wiring W is inserted through the inside of the concave cross-sectional portion formed by the plate-shaped arm portion 481a, the attachment portion 481d, and the bottom portion 481e (see FIG. 27). As a result, it is possible to prevent the wiring W from rubbing against other members or being sandwiched between other members.

In the plate-shaped arm portion 481a, a notch portion 481a1 is formed in a portion facing the front locking portion 481f, and the plate thickness of the plate-shaped arm portion 481a is reduced in the portion where the notch portion 481a1 is formed. ..

The cutout portion 481a1 is a recess formed in the plate-shaped arm portion 481a having a shape slightly larger than that of the front locking portion 481f in the front view, and is formed over the width direction of the plate-shaped arm portion 481a. In the portion where the cutout portion 481a1 is formed, the formation of the bottom portion 481e is omitted (the bottom portion 481e is formed through).

By configuring the notch portion 481a1 as described above, the first guide arm 481 can be easily manufactured by die molding (by die cutting in one direction). Further, by inserting the wiring W from the notch portion 481a1, the wiring W can be easily accommodated in the first guide arm 481.

The portion of the plate-shaped arm portion 481a other than the portion where the cutout portion 481a1 is formed is shorter than the overhang width of the front locking portion 481f with the attachment portion 481d. Therefore, in a state where the wiring W is housed in the first guide arm 481 and extended in the longitudinal direction (see FIG. 27A), the wiring W is prevented from falling off to the front side (front side in FIG. 27A). Can be prevented.

The plate-shaped arm portion 481a is provided with a rib portion N formed in a rib shape in the width direction on the side surface on the side facing the attachment portion 481d. The rib portion N is formed in the vicinity of the other side tubular portion 481c pivotally supported by the second guide arm 482, and is a rib projecting from the second guide arm 482 at the intermediate portion of the plate-shaped arm portion 481a. It is formed alternately with the part N.

The other side tubular portion 481c includes an enlarged diameter portion 481c1 whose inner diameter is partially increased, and the end surface on the back side is on the front side of the bottom portion 481e in order to form an overlapping margin with the second guide arm. It is formed (see FIG. 25 (b)).

The enlarged diameter portion 481c1 is formed on the inner peripheral side of the other side tubular portion 481c over a half circumference (upper half circumference in FIG. 25A), and is formed from the other side bottom portion 481e2 side of the other side tubular portion 481c. It is a recess formed up to approximately half the length of the cylinder of the side tubular portion 481c (see FIG. 25 (c)).

The attachment portion 481d includes an arc-shaped attachment portion 481d1 formed as an arc coaxial with the other-side tubular portion 481c around the other-side tubular portion 481c, and extends to the front side of the plate-shaped arm portion 481a. .. As a result, even when the flat surface locking portion 481f is formed, it is possible to secure a gap through which the wiring is inserted from the front side.

The attachment portion 481d is provided with a rib portion N formed in a rib shape in the width direction on the side surface on the side facing the plate-shaped arm portion 481a. The rib portion N is formed at an intermediate position between the rib portions N projecting from the plate-shaped arm portion 481a in the intermediate portion of the attachment portion 481d.

The arc-shaped attachment portion 481d1 is formed with a radius larger than the radius of the substantially arc-shaped shape formed when the wiring W bends to the outside of the other side tubular portion 481c (upper right of FIG. 27B). Radius.

Further, since the wiring guide arm 480 is formed at the inner upper end of the rear case 210 (see FIG. 7), when replacing or maintaining the wiring W, the wiring is attached by a route that is not blocked by the rear case 210. Need to remove. In the present embodiment, the attachment portion 481d close to the upper wall surface of the back case 210 is formed so as to project forward from the plate-shaped arm portion 481a separated from the upper wall surface of the back case 210. Therefore, for example, when removing the wiring W, the wiring W may be pulled out to the front side and pulled out in the direction from the attachment portion 481d to the plate-shaped arm portion 481a, so that the upper wall surface of the rear case 210 interferes with the work. Will never be. When inserting the wiring, insert it in the opposite direction. Therefore, the maintainability of replacing the wiring W can be improved.

The bottom portion 481e is arranged above the one-side tubular portion 481b and formed in a fan shape centered on the axis of the one-side tubular portion, and the other side bottom portion 481e1 is arranged above the other-side tubular portion 481c. The other side bottom portion 481e2 formed in a fan shape centered on a shaft spaced above the shaft of the side tubular portion 481c is mainly provided. The end of the arcuate attachment portion 481d1 is formed on the left side of the front view from the end of the other side bottom portion 481e2.

The plane locking portion 481f is a claw-shaped member that prevents the wiring W from falling off from the front side. That is, the wiring W is formed with a width shorter than the length from the bottom portion 481e to the front locking portion 481f.

26 (a) is a front view of the second guide arm 482, FIG. 26 (b) is a bottom view of the second guide arm 482, and FIG. 26 (c) is a view of XXVIc of FIG. 26 (a). FIG. 26 (d) is a cross-sectional view of the second guide arm 482 in the −XXVIc line, and FIG. 26 (d) is a cross-sectional view of the second guide arm 482 in the XXVId-XXVId line of FIG. 26 (a).

As shown in FIGS. 26 (a) to 26 (d), since the second guide arm 482 has a plurality of configurations of the same technical idea as the first guide arm 481, the description thereof will be omitted. To do. That is, the plate-shaped arm portion 481a is attached to the plate-shaped arm portion 482a, the other side tubular portion 481c is attached to the other side tubular portion 482c, the attachment portion 481d is attached to the attachment portion 482d, the bottom portion 481e is attached to the bottom portion 482e, and the front locking portion. 481f corresponds to the front locking portion 482f, respectively.

The plate-shaped arm portion 482a includes a notch portion 482a2 at a portion facing the front locking portion 482f. Since the technical idea of the notch portion 482a2 is the same as the technical idea of the notch portion 481a1, the description thereof will be omitted.

The plate-shaped arm portion 482a and the attachment portion 482d are provided with rib portions N on the side surfaces facing each other. In the vicinity of the one-sided shaft support 482b that is pivotally supported by the first guide arm 481, a rib portion N is formed in the attachment portion 482d, and in the intermediate portion of the second guide arm 482, the rib portion N is a plate-shaped arm portion 482a. And 482d are alternately formed.

The second guide arm 482 has a one-sided shaft support 482b and a one-sided shaft support 482b, which are formed in a columnar shape from the upper right portion of the bottom portion 482e to the front side and a fastening portion is formed at the tip thereof. One side bottom 482e1 which is formed in a substantially arc shape and extends on the same plane from the bottom 482e, and the right end of the plate-shaped arm 482a which is projected from the vicinity of the outer circumference of the one side bottom 482e1 to the front side. It is mainly provided with an arcuate plate portion 482a1 connected to the above.

The arcuate plate portion 482a1 is formed with a radius larger than the radius of the substantially arcuate shape formed when the wiring W bends to the outside of the other side tubular portion 481c (upper right of FIG. 27B). Radius.

The one-side shaft support portion 482b is a portion through which the reduced diameter portion 482b1 is formed and the other-side tubular portion 481c of the first guide arm 481 is inserted, and the front side surface of the one-side bottom portion 482e1 is the other-side cylinder. It is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the back side surface of the shaped portion 481c. Therefore, in the assembled state (see FIG. 27), the bottom portions 481e and 482e are formed on the same plane, and the bottom portions 481e and 482e can come into contact with each other in the respective rotation directions of the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482. It is formed. Therefore, over-rotation of the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482 can be prevented, and the wiring W can be prevented from being excessively bent (see FIG. 27).

The reduced diameter portion 482b1 is formed on the outer peripheral side of the one-side shaft support portion 482b over a half circumference (lower half circumference in FIG. 26A), and the one-side shaft support portion 482b is formed from the one-side bottom portion 482e1 side to the one-side shaft. It is a recess formed to a length of approximately half the length of the branch 482b (see FIG. 26 (c)).

Next, with reference to FIG. 27, the swing of the second guide arm 482 with respect to the first guide arm 481 will be described. 27 (a) and 27 (b) are front views of the first guide arm 481, the second guide arm 482, and the wiring W. Note that FIG. 27 (a) shows a state in which the second guide arm 482 is folded with respect to the first guide arm 481 (corresponding to the state of FIG. 29), and FIG. 27 (b) shows FIG. 27 (b). From the state of a) to the end of the movable range in which the second guide arm 482 can swing with respect to the first guide arm 481, the state of swinging counterclockwise in front view (corresponding to the state of FIG. 33). Illustrated. In FIG. 27 (b), the one side bottom portion 482e1 of the second guide arm 482 and the other side bottom portion 481e2 of the first guide arm 481 are brought into contact with each other to prevent further swinging of the second guide arm 482. Will be done.

As shown in FIG. 27 (a), the wiring W is a recessed portion (FIGS. 25 (d) and 26 (d)) formed by the plate-shaped arm portions 481a and 482a, the attachment portions 481d and 482d, and the bottom portions 481e and 482e. )) Is arranged inside. Therefore, due to the rigidity of the first guide arm 481 or the second guide arm 482, it is possible to prevent the wiring W from being bent to the extent that the wiring W is broken during the movement of the main body member 410.

Further, at the shaft support positions (right end in FIG. 27A) of the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482, the wiring W is arranged so as to wrap around the other side tubular portion 481c. Therefore, at the axial support positions of the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482, it is suppressed that the wiring W is bent with a radius of curvature equal to or less than the diameter of the other side tubular portion 481c. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the wiring W from being bent, and it is possible to suppress disconnection of the wiring W.

The state of FIG. 27A corresponds to the state shown in FIG. 29, that is, the state in which the main body member 410 is arranged at the retracted position. The higher the speed at which the main body member 410 is moved from the retracted position to the overhanging position, the easier it is to improve the effect. When starting the main body member 410 from the stopped state at the retracted position, it is necessary for the drive device 460 to generate a driving force that exceeds the inertial force of the main body member 410 and the inertial force of the wiring guide arm 480. Therefore, in the state of FIG. 27A, it is desirable that the rotational resistance of the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482 constituting the wiring guide arm 480 at the shaft support position is small.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 27A, in a state where the second guide arm 482 is folded with respect to the first guide arm 481, the diameter-expanded portion 481c1 and the diameter-expanded portion 481c1 and the circumference of the one-side tubular portion 481b are folded. The reduced diameter portion 482b1 surrounds it. The enlarged diameter portion 481c1 and the reduced diameter portion 482b1 are portions that are recessed in a direction away from the mating member forming the shaft support relationship, and have an effect of suppressing rotational friction during shaft rotation. When the second guide arm 482 is folded with respect to the first guide arm 481, the enlarged diameter portion 481c1 and the reduced diameter portion 482b1 are formed around the axis of the one-side tubular portion 481b (over the entire circumference). Therefore, the resistance when rotating the second guide arm 482 with respect to the first guide arm 481 is suppressed.

On the other hand, in the state of FIG. 27 (b), the range in which the enlarged diameter portion 481c1 and the reduced diameter portion 482b1 are arranged around the axis of the one-side tubular portion 481b is substantially half the circumference (the upper half circumference of FIG. 27 (b)). ). As shown in FIG. 27 (b), the enlarged diameter portion 481c1 and the reduced diameter portion 482b1 largely overlap each other. In this case, the rotational resistance of the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482 can be increased as compared with the state shown in FIG. 27 (a).

From the state where the second guide arm 482 is folded with respect to the first guide arm 481, the length at which the enlarged diameter portion 481c1 and the reduced diameter portion 482b1 overlap as the second guide arm 482 is rotated with respect to the first guide arm 481. The length becomes longer, and the rotational resistance of the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482 increases. That is, the speed of the second guide arm 482 can be reduced as the second guide arm 482 is rotated with respect to the first guide arm 481.

Therefore, the speed at which the other side bottom portion 481e2 and the one side bottom portion 482e1 come into contact with each other can be reduced, and the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482 are in contact with the other side bottom portion 481e2 and the one side bottom portion 482e1. The load received by contact can be suppressed. As a result, the durability of the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482 can be improved, and the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482 are on opposite sides (the second guide arm 482 is shown in FIG. 27). It is possible to prevent bending from the state of (b) to the side further rotated counterclockwise).

In the present embodiment, since the wiring guide arm 480 is formed by axially supporting three members, the moving speed of the wiring guide arm 480 can be changed even when the moving speed of the main body member 410 is constant. can do.

For example, in a state where the main body member 410 is arranged at the overhanging position (see FIG. 33), the posture of the wiring guide arm 480 is not limited to one, and the third guide arm 483 can rotate upward (posture). (Changeable) The amount can be changed. Therefore, the moving speed of the first guide arm 481 can be adjusted by changing the posture of the third guide arm 483 even while the main body member 410 is moving. Therefore, even if the moving speed of the wiring guide arm 480 is changed during the movement of the main body member 410, it is not necessary to change the moving speed of the main body member 410 accordingly.

As shown in FIG. 27 (b), when the other side bottom portion 481e2 and the one side bottom portion 482e1 are in contact with each other, a gap is formed between the arc-shaped attachment portion 481d1 and the arc-shaped plate portion 482a1. Even if the wiring W bends to the outside of the other side tubular portion 481c (upper right in FIG. 27B) due to this gap, the wiring W is sandwiched between the arc-shaped attachment portion 481d1 and the arc-shaped plate portion 482a1. It is possible to prevent the wiring W from being broken.

As shown in FIG. 27 (b), when the wiring guide arm 480 is in the open state, the wiring W moves significantly to the outside of the other side tubular portion 481c, and in particular, the first guide arm 481 and the second guide The wiring W tends to shift in position near the end (shaft support position) of the arm 482. When the wiring W is repeatedly displaced with respect to the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482, the wiring W and the inner side surfaces of the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482 rub against each other, and the durability of the wiring W becomes durable. There is a risk of reduced sex.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the rib portion N formed in a rib shape on the inner side surface of the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482 is caught in the wiring W, so that the wiring W and the first guide arm 481 and It is possible to improve the resistance with the second guide arm 482 and prevent the wiring W from being displaced.

The wiring W is effective by forming the rib portion N on the side surface opposite to the direction in which the wiring W separates from the other side tubular portion 481c in the vicinity of the shaft support positions of the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482. Can be supported. That is, for example, the portion of the wiring W projecting from the connecting position of the arc-shaped attachment portion 481d1 and the attachment portion 481d toward the attachment portion 481d side is pressed against the plate-shaped arm portion 481a along the shape of the arc-shaped attachment portion 481d1. .. Therefore, by forming the rib portion N in the pressed portion, the resistance between the wiring W and the plate-shaped arm portion 481a can be increased.

The side surface of the plate-shaped arm 481a on which the above-mentioned wiring W is pressed is curved to the opposite side of the attachment portion 481d and recessed, so that the wiring W is fitted into the recess and the wiring is performed. It is possible to suppress the misalignment between the W and the plate-shaped arm portion 481a. In this case, since the surface of the curved recess and the wiring W come into contact with each other by surface contact, local wear of the wiring W can be suppressed as compared with the case where the wiring W receives resistance from the rib portion N by point contact. Can be done.

Further, the distance between the plate-shaped arm portion 481a and the attachment portion 481d may be widened in the vicinity of the shaft support position. For example, the attachment portion 481d may be inclined so as to be separated from the plate-shaped arm portion 481a as it approaches the other side tubular portion 481c from the front locking portion 481f on the right side of FIG. 27 (b). In this case, the wiring W is curved by the portion where the distance between the attachment portion 481d and the plate-shaped arm portion 481a is widened (the portion near the other side tubular portion 481c) to reduce the slack of the wiring W near the support portion. It can be absorbed, and the misalignment of the wiring W at the intermediate portion (the portion sandwiched between the front locking portions 481f) of the first guide arm 481 can be suppressed (the wiring W cancels the slack near the support portion). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the first guide arm 481 from being displaced in the longitudinal direction). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the wiring W from rubbing against the inner surface of the first guide arm 481 and being worn, and to improve the durability of the wiring W.

In the intermediate portion between the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482, rib portions N are alternately formed on the inner side surfaces arranged so as to face each other. Therefore, the wiring W can be easily hooked on more rib portions N as compared with the case where the rib portions N are formed on only one of the inner side surfaces arranged so as to face each other. As a result, the resistance between the wiring W and the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482 can be increased, and the misalignment between the wiring W and the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482 is suppressed. can do.

In FIG. 27, a disk-shaped color member C fastened and fixed to the front side of the wiring guide arm 480 is illustrated by an imaginary line. The collar member C is fastened and fixed to, for example, the tip of the one-side shaft support 482b or the tip of the shaft support 472 (see FIG. 21) inserted into the one-side tubular portion 481b, and the front surface of each of the tubular portions 481b and 481c. It is a member that prevents movement to the side.

In the present embodiment, the color member C is extended to a position where at least a part of the adjacent attachment portions 481d and 482d overlaps in the front view, or even if they do not overlap in the front view, the color member C and the attachment portion 481d, It is extended from between the 482d and the wiring W to a position where the wiring W does not come off. For example, at the left end of FIG. 27 (b), there is a gap between the collar member C and the attachment portion 481d, but the wiring W is deformed so as to be separated from the one-side tubular portion 481b (bulging outward). Therefore, there is little possibility that the wiring W will fall out from the gap. That is, the color member C is extended until it overlaps with the wiring W in the front view (FIG. 27), so that the collar member C has a sufficient diameter to prevent the wiring W from falling off. As a result, the wiring W is prevented from falling off from the wiring guide arm 480.

Here, assuming that the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482 are formed to have the same length, the collar member C is brought into contact with the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482 when they are folded. You will not be able to fold it. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the lengths of the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482 in the longitudinal direction are different. That is, in a state where the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482 are folded until their extension directions are parallel to each other (see FIG. 27A), they are arranged on the front side of the one-side tubular portion 481b. The collar member C provided and the collar member C disposed on the front side of the other side tubular portion 482c are different to the extent that they do not interfere with each other.

Thereby, while suppressing the wiring W from falling off from the wiring guide arm 480 by disposing the collar member C, it is possible to suppress the arrangement space by folding the wiring guide arm 480. It is desirable that the lengths of the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482 in the longitudinal direction (the length of the collar member C to the axis) differ from the diameter of the collar member C or more.

Next, the operation of the combined operation unit 400 will be described. First, the change in the posture of the shielding member 420 with respect to the sliding movement of the main body member 410 will be described with reference to FIGS. 28 to 33.

28 is a front view of the combined operation unit 400, FIG. 29 is a rear view of the combined operation unit 400, FIG. 30 is a front view of the combined operation unit 400, and FIG. 31 is a front view of the combined operation unit 400. 32 is a front view of the combined operation unit 400, and FIG. 33 is a rear view of the combined operation unit 400.

In addition, in FIGS. 28 and 29, the state in which the main body member 410 is arranged in the retracted position is shown, and in FIGS. 30 and 31, the posture of the swing base member 421 with respect to the main body member 410 from the state of FIGS. 28 and 29. The main body member 410 is arranged at an intermediate position where the slide shaft portion 423e of the connecting member 423 is arranged at the inner end of the guide hole 424b in a state where the main body member 410 is arranged. The state in which the member 410 is arranged at the overhanging position is illustrated.

Further, in FIG. 28, the main body member 431 of the swing member 430 is shown by an imaginary line, and in FIGS. 28, 30 and 32, a part of the main body member 410 is shown by a hidden line and the overlapping portion P is shown by an imaginary line. In FIGS. 29, 31 and 33, the rear upper plate 470 is illustrated by an imaginary line.

Further, in FIG. 30, the vicinity of the connecting member 423 is magnified, and in the magnified view, a state in which the connecting member 423 is moved by a predetermined amount from the central end of the pair of guide holes 424b is illustrated by an imaginary line. Will be done. Further, in FIG. 31, the vicinity of the guide hole 413 is magnified, and in the magnified view, a state in which the insertion shaft portion 421c is moved by a predetermined amount from the lower end portion of the guide hole 413 is illustrated by an imaginary line.

The main body member 410 is moved in the vertical direction along the guide hole 452 as the leg member 440 meshed with the drive gear 463 is rotated by rotating the drive gear 463.

As shown in FIGS. 28 and 29, the contact plate 421d of the swing base member 421 of the shielding member 420 is supported by the decorative plate portion 418 of the base member 411 in a state where the main body member 410 is arranged in the retracted position. Therefore, the central portion in the left-right direction of the swing base member 421 is supported. In this state, the slide shaft portion 423e of the connecting member 423 is arranged at the lateral end of the guide hole 424b of the guide plate 424 in the left-right direction, and the insertion shaft portion 421c of the shielding member 420 is the lower end portion of the guide hole 413 of the main body member 410. The wiring guide arm 480 is folded so that the extending directions of the guide arms are parallel to each other. Further, the upper side surface of the slide lever 473 and the lower side surface of the holding portion 415 are brought into contact with each other to prevent the main body member 410 from moving downward.

As shown in FIG. 28, at least a part of the mechanical portion of the swing member 430 such as the transmission gear 435 is a gap (formed in the center in the left-right direction and downward) formed between the pair of decorative members 422 of the shielding member 420. It is arranged in a gap that becomes wider as it goes (see FIGS. 28 and 34). As a result, in the state where the main body member 410 is arranged in the retracted position, the swing member 430 can be packed and arranged in the shielding member 420 in the vertical direction, and the width of the shielding member 420 and the swing member 430 in the vertical direction can be increased. It can be suppressed. In this case, since the area of the front view formed by the main body member 410, the shielding member 420, and the swinging member 430 can be reduced, the opening 211a (see FIG. 6) can be made larger accordingly.

Here, for example, a mechanical portion such as a transmission gear 435 of the swing member 430 may be arranged on the front side of the main body member 410. In this case, in order to increase the area of the overlapping portion P between the main body member 410 and the decorative member 422 (the main body member 410 and the decorative member 422 are brought together in the moving direction of the main body member 410), the decorative member 422 is a mechanical portion thereof. It is conceivable to place it on the front side of. On the other hand, in this case, since it is necessary to move the swing member 430 accommodating the decorative member 422 to the front side (direction away from the main body member 410), the space on the front side of the swing member 430 is suppressed and the neck It becomes difficult to form the swing member 430 three-dimensionally on the front side.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, at least a part of the swing member 430 (mechanical part such as the transmission gear 435) can be accommodated in the space created by the pair of decorative members 422 being separated from each other. it can. As a result, for example, it is not necessary to move the decorative member 422 to the front side of the mechanical portion of the swing member 430 in order to increase the area of the overlapping portion P between the main body member 410 and the decorative member 422. The 430 can be arranged close to the main body member 410. As a result, the swing member 430 can be three-dimensionally formed on the front side.

In FIG. 28, since the swing member 430 takes a posture in which the main body member 431 is tilted (see FIG. 34), the vertical width in the front view is suppressed as compared with the standing posture (see FIGS. 32 and 35). To. Therefore, even when the swing member 430 is viewed alone, the area of the front view formed by the swing member 430 can be suppressed.

As shown in FIGS. 30 and 31, the contact plate 421d of the swing base member 421 of the shielding member 420 is supported by the decorative plate portion 418 of the base member 411 in a state where the main body member 410 is arranged at an intermediate position. The left-right central portion of the swing base member 421 is supported (that is, the shielding member 420 is in the same posture as in FIGS. 28 and 29). In this state, the slide shaft portion 423e of the connecting member 423 is arranged at the inner end of the guide hole 424b of the guide plate 424 in the left-right direction, and the insertion shaft portion 421c of the shielding member 420 is the lower end portion of the guide hole 413 of the main body member 410. Placed in. Further, in the wiring guide arm 480, the third guide arm 483 is mounted on the upper side surface of the main body member 410, and the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482 take an inclined posture with respect to the left-right direction, respectively.

Since the third guide arm 483 is formed shorter than the other guide arms 481 and 482, the main body member is in a state where the third guide arm 483 is stably mounted on the upper side surface of the main body member 410. It can be maintained longer while the 410 is in motion. As a result, the wiring W arranged inside the wiring guide arm 480 can be made more stable, and disconnection of the wiring W can be prevented.

Here, when the main body member 410 is moved downward at a high speed and is arranged at an intermediate position, the slide shaft portion 423e of the connecting member 423 bounces off at the inner end of the guide hole 424b, and the swing base of the shielding member 420. The shaft support position (shaft support rod 423c, see FIG. 23) between the member 421 and the connecting member 423 may bounce upward, and the posture of the shielding member 420 may not be stable. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the guide hole 413 for guiding the insertion shaft portion 421c of the swing base member 421 is formed so as to incline toward the inside in the left-right direction, and the slide shaft portion 423e is guided. Holes 424b are formed in the left-right direction.

In other words, when the slide shaft portion 423e reaches the inner end of the guide hole 424b, the insertion shaft portion 421c is a directional component perpendicular to the rebounding direction of the shaft support positions of the swing base member 421 and the connecting member 423. It is guided so as to be movable in the direction of having.

Therefore, a resistor F directed downward from the upper side surface of the guide hole 413 is applied to the insertion shaft portion 421c that is moved upward as the swing base member 421 moves upward, and is above the insertion shaft portion 421c. Movement to is suppressed. In this case, it is suppressed that the swing base member 421 bounces upward and the slide shaft portion 423e of the connecting member 423 bounces at the inner end of the guide hole 424b. In addition, even if the swing base member 421 bounces upward and the connecting member 423 bounces upward, the slide shaft portion 423e comes into contact with the upper and lower side surfaces of the guide hole 424b, so that the movement of the connecting member is suppressed. Will be done.

Further, in the present embodiment, even if the bending portion 423b is formed in the connecting member 423 and the slide shaft portion 423e of the connecting member 423 bounces off at the inner end of the guide hole 424b, the bending portion 423b is the swing base member 421. It moves in a direction away from the upper side surface (the bent portion 213b moves to the center side in the left-right direction by a distance X). Therefore, when the slide shaft portion 423e of the connecting member 423 bounces off at the inner end of the guide hole 424b in the left-right direction, a sufficient distance can be formed between the connecting member 423 and the swing base member 421, and the connecting member 423 and the connecting member 423 can be separated from each other. It is possible to prevent the rocking base member 421 from colliding with the rocking base member 421. As a result, the degree of freedom in designing the swing base member 421 can be improved.

In the state where the main body member 410 is arranged at the intermediate position, the connecting member 423 connected to the swing base member 421 suppresses the movement of the swing base member 421 in the left-right direction. That is, for example, when the swing base member 421 starts to move to the left in the front view due to disturbance, the connecting member 423 inserted into the guide hole 424b on the right in the front view is located at the center of the pair of guide holes 424b in the left-right direction. The movement is dammed at the end, and the movement of the swing base member 421 in the left-right direction is suppressed. Therefore, the arrangement of the swing base member 421 can be stabilized.

As shown in FIGS. 32 and 33, the swing base member 421 of the shielding member 420 is suspended and supported by the connecting member 423 in a state where the main body member 410 is arranged at the overhanging position. In this state, the slide shaft portion 423e of the connecting member 423 is arranged at the inner end of the guide hole 424b of the guide plate 424 in the left-right direction, and the insertion shaft portion 421c of the shielding member 420 is the upper end portion of the guide hole 413 of the main body member 410. Placed in. Further, the wiring guide arm 480 has a posture in which the other side bottom 481e2 (see FIG. 25) of the first guide arm 481 and the one side bottom 482e1 (see FIG. 26) of the second guide arm 482 are in contact with each other in the swing direction. Take.

Here, when the main body member 410 moves from the intermediate position to the overhanging position, the pair of left and right insertion shaft portions 421c move upward along the guide holes 413 in opposite directions in the left-right direction. That is, the forces applied to the pair of swing base members 421 from the pair of left and right guide holes 413 of the main body member 410 are directed in opposite directions to each other and cancel each other out. Therefore, the swing shaft hole 421b (see FIG. 33) formed on the central axis of the pair of swing base members 421 is suppressed from being displaced in the left-right direction, so that the shielding member 420 is displaced in the left-right direction. Is suppressed.

As shown in FIG. 33, the pair of swing base members 421 and the pair of decorative members 422 of the shielding member 420 are in contact with each other in a state where the main body member 410 is arranged at the overhanging position. As a result, for example, even if one swing base member 421 moves faster than the other swing base member 421 and the pair of swing base members 421 are displaced from each other (deviation in the vertical direction), the other The displacement can be suppressed by the contact with the swing base member 421. As a result, the posture of the shielding member 420 at the overhanging position can be stabilized.

The change in the area of the overlapping portion P will be described. The overlapping portion P means a portion where the main body member 410 and the shielding member 420 overlap in the front view. As shown in FIGS. 28 and 30, most of the main body member 410 corresponds to the overlapping portion P from the state where the main body member 410 is arranged at the retracted position to the state where the main body member 410 is arranged at the intermediate position. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 32, when the main body member 410 is arranged at the overhanging position, the shielding member 420 is moved above the main body member 410, especially in the central portion in the left-right direction, and the area of the overlapping portion P is increased. Is made smaller. That is, the main body member 410 and the shielding member 420 can be visually recognized separately.

As a result, the area of the main body member 410 and the shielding member 420 in the front view is larger when the main body member 410 is arranged in the overhanging position than when the main body member 410 is arranged in the retracted position. It is made larger, and the width in the vertical direction is expanded especially in the central part in the horizontal direction. In this case, the area change in the front view of the region formed by the main body member 410 and the shielding member 420 in the central portion of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2), which easily attracts the attention of the player, can be increased, and the effect is produced. The effect can be improved.

In the present embodiment, the change in the area of the overlapping portion P described above occurs after the main body member 410 and the shielding member 420 start to project to the front of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2). As a result, the effect can be performed as if the main body member 410 and the shielding member 420 expand, and the effect of the effect can be improved.

Next, the operation of the swing member 430 of the composite operation unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 34 and 35. FIG. 34 is a partial cross-sectional view of the combined operation unit 400 on the line XXXIV-XXXIV of FIG. 28, and FIG. 35 is a partial cross-sectional view of the combined operation unit 400 on the line XXXV-XXXV of FIG. In FIG. 34, the tilted state of the main body member 431 of the swing member 430 is shown by a solid line, and the hanging portion 422b of the decorative member 422 is accommodated between the main body member 431 of the swing member 430 and the main body member 410. The state is illustrated. Further, in FIG. 35, the state in which the main body member 431 of the swing member 430 is erected is shown by a solid line, and the state in which the swing member 430 is tilted is shown by an imaginary line for reference, and is arranged in an overhanging state. The moving member 540 of the swinging operation unit 500 is illustrated by an imaginary line.

As shown in FIGS. 34 and 35, the drive gear 434 is rotated by the drive motor 433 (see FIG. 23), and the transmission gear 435 is rotated accordingly, so that the connecting shaft 435c moves back and forth, and the connecting shaft 435c is connected. When the connecting member 436 pivotally supported by the shaft 435c moves in the front-rear direction, the main body member 431 pivotally supported by the connecting member 436 swings around the shaft support portion 416 (see FIG. 23). In this case, the main body member 431 is moved in the direction of approaching and separating from the decorative member 422b. The swing member 430 can switch between the tilted state shown in FIG. 34 and the standing state shown in FIG. 35 at an arbitrary position, and the posture can be changed as long as it does not interfere with the shielding member 420.

Since the shaft support portion 416 (see FIG. 23) is connected to the lower end side of the swing member 430, when the swing member 430 is in the tilted state (see FIG. 34), the upper end side is arranged to face the shielding member 420. It is possible to secure a large distance D between the main body member 410 and the main body member 410. On the other hand, the movement width of the lower end portion of the swing member 430 on the opposite side of the shielding member 420 can be reduced, and the swing member 430 can be compared with the case where the swing member 430 slides back and forth. The space required for arranging the above can be suppressed.

In other words, when securing a space for accommodating the shielding member 420 by sliding in the front-rear direction, the lower end portion of the swing member 430 on the opposite side of the shielding member 420 also moves by the interval D in the same manner as the upper end portion. As a result, the space for arranging the swing member 430 increases accordingly. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the swing member 430 is swung, the shielding member 420 is smoothly accommodated between the main body member 410 and the swing member 430, and the arrangement area of the swing member 430 is arranged. It is possible to achieve both suppression and suppression.

In the present embodiment, the change width d of the outer shape of the lower part on the front side of the main body member 431 is small, particularly while the swinging member 430 tilts. Therefore, even if the main body member 431 is tilted in a state where the other members are close to or in contact with each other below the main body member 431 (see FIG. 9), it is possible to suppress the load from being applied between the members.

In the present embodiment, in the state of FIG. 9, the upper surface of the moving member 540 (see FIG. 40) arranged to face the main body member 431 forms a downwardly convex curved surface, and the main body member 431 is close to this curved surface. The main body member 431 can be tilted at a position (a position where the main body member 431 and the moving member 540 partially overlap each other in the front view). As a result, the posture of the main body member 431 can be changed by a large width at the upper part of the main body member 431 while ensuring the effect that the main body member 431 and the moving member 540 are brought close to each other and visually recognized integrally at the lower part of the main body member 431. it can.

As shown in FIGS. 34 and 35, the decorative member 422 of the shielding member 420 is inclined downward (closer to the shaft support 416 (see FIG. 23)) and toward the back surface (main body member 410 side). It is formed so as to be curved in a direction away from the swing member 430. In this case, when the decorative member 422 starts to be accommodated between the swing member 430 and the main body member 410, the distance between the decorative member 422 and the swing member 430 can be secured, and the decorative member 422 and the neck can be secured. Collision with the swing member 430 can be avoided.

Further, the lower end portion of the decorative member 422 can be stored deeply (downward) in the gap formed between the main body member 410 and the swing member 430 while the upper end portion of the decorative member 422 is projected to the front. .. Since no other member is arranged on the front side of the swing member 430, the degree of freedom in designing the shape of the front portion of the swing member 430 can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 35, when the swing member 430 is erected, the decorative member 422 is separated upward from between the swing member 430 and the main body member 410, and the main body member 431 of the swing member 430 is separated. The upper end portion and the main body member 410 are arranged close to each other. As a result, it is possible to fill the dead space when the decorative member 422 is not accommodated between the main body member 410 and the swing member 430. Further, by making it possible to form a posture in which the main body member 431 of the swing member 430 is arranged close to the main body member 410, the movement width of the swing member 430 in the front-rear direction in the pachinko machine 10 in which the front-rear width is defined is increased. It can be secured, and the effect of swinging the swing member 430 can be improved.

Here, in FIG. 34, a state in which the swing member 430 is arranged above the third symbol display device 81 and the swing member 430 is tilted is shown. In this case, the direction A1 of the effect surface on the front side of the swing member 430 is a direction inclined diagonally downward toward the front. On the other hand, in FIG. 35, the swing member 430 is arranged on the front side of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2), and the state in which the swing member 430 is erected is shown by a solid line. In this case, the direction A2 of the effect surface on the front side of the swing member 430 is directed to the front. That is, by adjusting the degree of swing of the swing member 430, the directions A1 and A2 of the swing member 430 on the front side are directed toward the player's eyes (the center front side of the third symbol display device 81). Can be adjusted to. Therefore, the attention of the swing member 430 can be improved, and the effect of the effect can be improved.

Further, in order to improve the attention of the swing member 430, a new rotating shaft is not provided, and the shaft branch 416 (see FIG. 23) is utilized. That is, the shaft support portion 416 is used for the purpose of securing a distance between the decorative member 422 and the swing member 430 when the decorative member 422 starts to be accommodated between the swing member 430 and the main body member 410. It is also used for the purpose of adjusting the front side orientations A1 and A2 of the member 430 toward the player's eyes (the front side of the center of the third symbol display device 81).

The degree of swing of the swing member 430 can be determined by whether or not the sensor passing portion 435d passes through the photo sensor 417. That is, in the state shown in FIG. 34, the sensor passing portion 435d does not pass through the photo sensor 417. On the other hand, in the state shown in FIG. 35, the sensor passing portion 435 has passed through the photo sensor 417. Therefore, in the present embodiment, a gap is secured between the swing member 430 and the main body member 410 in a state where the sensor passing portion 435 does not pass through the photo sensor 417.

Therefore, by moving the main body member 410 ascendingly while the sensor passing portion 435 does not pass through the photo sensor 417, the shielding member 420 can be combined with the main body member 410 without interfering with the swinging member 430 and the shielding member 420. It can be accommodated between the swing member 430 and the swing member 430.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 36 and 37, it will be described that the shape of the hanging portion 422b suppresses the malfunction of the operation of the composite operation unit 400. FIG. 36 is a front view of the combined operation unit 400, and FIG. 37 is a partial cross-sectional view of the combined operation unit 400 in the line XXXVII-XXXVII of FIG. It should be noted that FIGS. 36 and 37 show a state in which the main body member 431 of the swing member 430 is tilted by a predetermined angle from the upright state (see FIG. 35) and the back surface side of the main body member 431 is in contact with the hanging portion 422b. ..

As shown in FIGS. 36 and 37, the main body member 410 is moved up and down in a state where the main body member 431 of the swing member 430 is in the middle of the standing state (see FIG. 35) and the tilted state (see FIG. 34). There are cases where control is performed. This control is performed, for example, when the combined operation unit 400 is immediately changed from the state shown in FIG. 34 to the state shown in FIG. 35.

Here, the drive motor 462 (see FIG. 21) that drives the main body member 410 after confirming that the main body member 431 of the swing member 430 reaches the tilted state (see the broken line in FIG. 35) from the upright state shown in FIG. 35. If the main body member 431 is rotated, the state in which the back surface side of the main body member 431 comes into contact with the hanging portion 422b cannot occur (see FIG. 34).

However, in this case, the drive motor 462 (see FIG. 21) is rotated after waiting for the completion of the operation of the swing member 430. Therefore, as compared with the case where the drive motor 433 (see FIG. 23) that tilts the swing member 430 and the drive motor 462 that drives the main body member 410 are simultaneously rotated, the combined operation unit 400 is moved from the state of FIG. 34 to FIG. 35. The period for changing to a state becomes longer. In other words, in order to immediately change the combined operation unit 400 from the state of FIG. 34 to the state of FIG. 35, it is necessary to drive the drive motor 433 and the drive motor 462 at the same time. In this case, the main body member 410 of the swing member 430 is moved up and down while the main body member 431 is in the standing state (see FIG. 35) to the tilted state (see FIG. 34). In this case, the main body portion 431 of the swing member 430 may come into contact with the hanging portion 422b, causing the composite operation unit 400 to malfunction.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the drooping portion 422b is formed in a curved shape (see FIG. 37). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 37, the contact of the swing member 430 with the back surface side (formed by a plane) of the main body member 431 is not a contact on a surface but a contact on a point (line). It is possible to suppress the frictional resistance at the contact position. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the composite operation unit 400 from malfunctioning due to the contact between the main body member 431 of the swing member 430 and the hanging portion 422b.

For example, when the state of FIGS. 36 and 37 is a state in which the main body member 410 is in the process of ascending and moving from FIG. 35, the frictional resistance at the contact position between the main body member 431 of the swing member 430 and the hanging portion 422b is increased. If it is large, it causes a decrease in the moving speed of the main body member 410. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the frictional resistance at the contact position between the main body member 431 of the swing member 430 and the hanging portion 422b is suppressed, the moving speed of the main body member 410 can be increased. Further, as the main body member 410 moves upward, the main body member 431 of the swing member 430 tilts with respect to the curved shape of the hanging portion 422b, so that the hanging portion 422b exerts a driving force on the main body member 431 of the swing member 430. A giving relationship arises. As a result, it is possible to reduce the burden on the drive motor 433 to tilt the swing member 430.

Further, for example, when the state of FIGS. 36 and 37 is a state in which the main body member 410 is in the process of descending from FIG. 34, the friction at the contact position between the main body member 431 of the swing member 430 and the hanging portion 422b. If the resistance is large, it becomes a factor that reduces the moving speed of the main body member 410. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the frictional resistance at the contact position between the main body member 431 of the swing member 430 and the hanging portion 422b is suppressed, the moving speed of the main body member 410 can be increased. Further, since the hanging portion 422b is formed so as to be inclined downward and inclined diagonally backward and the back surface side of the main body member 431 is formed in a flat shape, even if the main body member 410 moves downward while they are in contact with each other, the hanging portion is formed. The 422b and the main body member 431 do not get caught in each other.

From these, it is possible to prevent the composite operation unit 400 from malfunctioning by moving the main body member 410 while the main body member 431 of the swing member 430 is tilted. Therefore, the state of the composite operation unit 400 can be changed immediately by moving the main body member 410 while the main body member 431 of the swing member 430 is tilted.

Next, the swing operation unit 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 38 to 50. FIG. 38 is a front perspective view of the rocking operation unit 500, and FIG. 39 is a rear perspective view of the rocking operation unit 500. Note that FIGS. 38 and 39 show a state in which the moving member 540 is arranged at the retracted position.

The swing operation unit 500 is composed of a pair of left and right operation units (see FIG. 5), but since they have the same technical configuration, in FIGS. 38 to 50, the operation on the left side of the pair of left and right operation units is performed. The unit will be described as a swinging operation unit 500.

FIG. 40 is a front exploded perspective view of the rocking operation unit 500, and FIG. 41 is a rear exploded perspective view of the rocking operation unit 500. In addition, in FIG. 40, the fastening hole portion 527 is partially magnified, and in FIG. 41, the bridge member 528 is partially magnified.

As shown in FIGS. 40 and 41, in the swinging operation unit 500, a rectangular plate-shaped base member 510 and shaft support holes 522 and 526 are formed at both ends of the base member 510, and one side shaft support hole 522 is formed in the base member 510. The distance between the central shafts of the long plate-shaped drive side arm member 520 and the shaft support holes 532 and 533 formed at both ends is the shaft support hole 522 of the drive side arm member 520. , 526 is a long plate-shaped driven side arm member 530 that has a length equivalent to the distance between the central axes and one end of which one side shaft support hole 532 is swingably supported by the base member 510. A horizontally long block-shaped moving member 540 that is swingably supported by the other side shaft support hole 526 of the drive side arm member 520 and the other side shaft support hole 533 of the driven side arm member 530, and the drive side arm member 520. The drive motor 551 is arranged on the front side of the base member 510 with the drive side arm member 520 and the driven side arm member 530 sandwiched between the drive device 550 for generating the driving force for swinging the motor, and the drive motor 551 is fastened and fixed. Mainly includes a front plate member 560.

The base member 510 includes a plate-shaped main body portion 511, a plurality of shaft support portions 512 projecting in a columnar shape from the right side portion of the main body portion 511 to the front side, and the lowermost shaft support portion 512 thereof. A drive gear receiving hole 513 formed on the left side of the front view of the three shaft portion 512c, a photo sensor 514 arranged on the right side of the shaft support portion 512, and a rectangle from the left side portion of the main body portion 511 to the front side. It mainly includes a lower support portion 515 projecting from the shape.

The main body portion 511 is formed so that the height of the upper end portion of the first shaft portion 512a is different between the left side in front view and the right side in front view. That is, on the left side of the first shaft portion 512a in front view, a step-down portion 511a whose upper side surface is lowered by one step is provided.

The step-down portion 511a has an effect of expanding the display area of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 8) in a state where the moving member 540 of the swing operation unit 500 is arranged at the overhanging position. Further, in a state where the moving member 540 is arranged in the retracted position, for example, when the driven side arm member 530 falls backward, the area where the driven side arm member 530 and the main body portion 511 may come into contact with each other in the front-rear direction is increased. It can be reduced (see FIG. 39). As a result, when the moving member 540 moves from the retracted position to the overhanging position, or when the moving member 540 moves from the overhanging position to the retracted position, the driven side arm member 530 and the main body portion 511 are brought together. The area that may be rubbed can be reduced, and the moving member 540 can be moved smoothly.

The shaft support portion 512 is formed of three rod members whose shafts are parallel to each other while being spaced apart from each other in the vertical direction, and one end of the driven side arm member is pivotally supported in this order from the top. The shaft portion 512a, the second shaft portion 512b on which one end of the drive side arm member is pivotally supported, and the third shaft portion 512c on which the transmission gear 553 meshed with the drive gear 552 is pivotally supported. Mainly prepare.

The drive gear receiving hole 513 is a through hole for internally fitting a step portion projecting to the back surface side of the drive gear 552.

The lower support portion 515 is in contact with the lower side of the lower side surface of the other end portion of the drive side arm member 520 in a state where the drive side arm member 520 is arranged in the retracted position, and the lower support portion 515 is in contact with the lower side of the lower side surface of the other end portion of the drive side arm member 520. The portion is prevented from swinging further downward.

The drive side arm member 520 is a member formed of a resin material, and is one end of a main body plate portion 521 formed in a long plate shape and the main body plate portion 521 (the end portion on the right side when viewed from the front). ), A semicircle centered on a one-sided shaft support hole 522 formed in the front-rear direction and through which the second shaft portion 512b is inserted, and a one-side shaft support hole 522 formed below the one-side shaft support hole 522. A gear portion 523 in which gear teeth are engraved on the outer circumference of the gear portion 523, a sensor passing plate 524 fastened and fixed to a raised portion 521a raised from the vicinity of the outer circumference of the gear portion 523 to the front side, and a one-side shaft support hole 522. A collar member 525 having through holes arranged coaxially and fastened and fixed to the back side of the main body plate 521, and the other end of the main body plate 521 (the left end when viewed from the front) are bored in the front-rear direction. The other side shaft support hole 526 in which the second shaft portion 542b of the moving member 540 is pivotally supported via the collar, and a pair of fastening holes arranged near the other end of the main body plate portion 521 and bored in the front-rear direction. It mainly includes a pair of fastening hole portions 527 including 527a1 and 527b1 and a bridge member 528 in which the insertion portions 528a2 and 528b2 are inserted into the fastening hole portion 527 and fastened and fixed.

The main body plate portion 521 is provided with a raised portion 521a at one end (right end in FIG. 40), which is inserted into the guide hole portion 563 and the sensor passing plate 524 is fastened and fixed to the tip.

The gear portion 523 is a portion that is meshed with the second gear portion 553b of the transmission gear 553 of the drive device 550 (see FIG. 48), and includes an umbrella portion 523a that is overlaid on the front side.

In the present embodiment, the umbrella portion 523a is formed so as to cover the entire gear tooth 523 (see FIG. 48). However, the umbrella portion 523a does not necessarily have to cover the entire gear tooth 523, and is formed so as to cover at least the gear teeth of the second gear portion 553b of the transmission gear 553, so that the umbrella portion 523a is formed as the second gear portion. The contact with 553b is possible, and the wobbling of the drive side arm member 520 can be prevented.

The sensor passing plate 524 is a member arranged on the front side of the front plate member 560 in the assembled state (see FIG. 42), and is a fastening portion that is raised and fastened to one end of the main body plate portion 521. It mainly includes a 524a and a sensor passing plate portion 524b extending in the radial direction about the one-side shaft support hole 522 in the assembled state from the fastening portion 524a.

The sensor passing plate portion 524b is a member that is arranged to face the front side surface of the front plate member 560 and passes through the inside of the photo sensor 514. Here, the sensor passing plate portion 524b can be brought into contact with the front side surface of the front plate member 560, and the sensor passing plate portion 524b is brought into contact with the front plate member 560 to bring the drive side arm member 520 into contact. Shaft tilting with respect to the biaxial portion 512b is suppressed. On the other hand, the sensor passing plate portion 524b is a member capable of detecting that the drive side arm member 520 is in the retracted position by passing through the inside of the photo sensor 514. That is, the sensor passage plate portion 524b can be used for both increasing the resistance to deformation (shaft tilt) of the drive side arm member 520 and detecting the posture of the drive side arm member 520.

The color member 525 is a plate-shaped member having a substantially diamond shape with rounded outer shapes, and has a main body portion 525a having a circular outer shape having a diameter at the end in the lateral direction of the outer shape, and a main body thereof. An outer fitting hole 525b formed in the center of the portion 525a, and a pair of fastening portions 525c arranged on both the left and right sides of the main body portion 525a and having a tapered tip and fixed to the main body plate portion 521. Mainly prepared.

The pair of fastening hole portions 527 includes a first fastening hole portion 527a to which the first bridge member 528a is fixed, and a second fastening hole portion 527b to which the second bridge member 528b is fixed.

As shown in FIG. 40, since the pair of fastening holes 527 are formed on the other side shaft support portion 526 side (the side on which the moving member 540 is arranged) of the drive side arm member 520, the fastening hole 527 and the one side shaft are formed. A long distance from the support hole 522 can be secured. Therefore, as will be described later, even if the driven side arm member 530 comes into contact with the bridge member 528 and the drive side arm member 520 may be twisted and deformed, the deformation is caused by the fastening hole 527 and the one-side shaft support hole 522. It can be generated using a long distance in the part between and (the twist angle per predetermined length in the longitudinal direction can be reduced). In this case, the load applied from the one-side shaft support hole 522 to the second shaft portion 512b (the load in the direction of tilting and folding the second shaft portion 512b) can be suppressed, and the durability of the second shaft portion 512b is improved. be able to.

The first fastening hole portion 527a is bored adjacent to the first fastening hole 527a1 to which the first bridge member 528a is fastened and fixed, and the first fastening hole 527a1 and the auxiliary protrusion 528a3 is inserted. The first bridge member 528a is provided with a first pin fastening hole 527a2 to which the first bridge member 528a is non-rotatably fixed.

The first fastening hole 527a1 and the first pinning hole 527a2 are arranged along a line forming a predetermined angle θ1 (θ1 <90 degrees) with respect to the lateral direction of the drive side arm member 520 (see FIG. 43). ..

The second fastening hole 527b is bored adjacent to the second fastening hole 527b1 to which the second bridge member 528b is fastened and fixed, and the second fastening hole 527b1, and the auxiliary protrusion 528b3 is inserted. The second pin fastening hole 527b2 to which the second bridge member 528b is non-rotatably fixed, and the base portion 527b3 formed in such a manner that the outer edges of the second fastening hole 527b1 and the second pin fastening hole 527b2 are raised to the front side. , Equipped with.

The second fastening hole 527b1 and the second pin fastening hole 527b2 are arranged along a line forming a predetermined angle θ2 (θ2 <90 degrees) with respect to the lateral direction of the drive side arm member 520 (see FIG. 43). .. That is, when the second bridge member 528b bends and deforms toward the front side in FIG. 43, the load applied to the drive side arm member 520 is defined as the twisting direction (the direction of rotation about the longitudinal direction of the drive side arm member 520). It can be divided in the bending direction (the direction in which the drive side arm member 520 bends toward the front side). As a result, when the second bridge member 528b receives a load from the driven side arm member 530 and is flexed and deformed, it is possible to prevent the drive side arm member 520 from being twisted and deformed about the longitudinal direction.

The bridge member 528 is arranged on the opposite side of the other side shaft support 526 with the first bridge member 528a arranged on the side close to the other side shaft support 526 and the first bridge member 528a. A second bridge member 528b, which is formed to be larger (longer and wider in the lateral direction) than the first bridge member 528a, is provided.

The first bridge member 528a projects from the main body portion 528a1 formed in the shape of a long plate, the insertion portion 528a2 that is inserted into and fastened to the first fastening hole 527a1, and the insertion portion 528a2. Auxiliary protrusion 528a3, rib portion 528a4 formed along the side edge of the main body portion 581a1 on the side close to the other side shaft support hole 526, and projecting toward the back side, and an end portion of the rib portion 528a4. 528a5, which is inclined with respect to the projecting direction, is mainly provided.

The main body portion 528a1 is formed with a length that covers the driven side arm member 530 in a front view in the assembled state (see FIG. 48).

The auxiliary protrusion 528a3 is a portion inserted into the first pin fastening hole 527a2 formed adjacent to the first fastening hole 527a1 of the main body plate portion 521, whereby the bridge member 528 is inserted into the main body plate portion 521. 2 points are supported. Therefore, the bridge member 528 can be fixed to the main body plate portion 521 so as not to rotate relative to each other.

Since the rib portion 528a4 is not formed up to the tip of the main body portion 528a1, contact with the driven side arm member 530 is suppressed at the retracted position (see FIG. 48), and the driven side arm is suppressed at the overhanging position (see FIG. 50). It is formed in such a manner that it easily comes into contact with the member 530. The details will be described later.

The second bridge member 528b is projected adjacent to the main body portion 528b1 formed in the shape of a long plate, the insertion portion 528b2 that is inserted into and fastened to the second fastening hole 527b1, and the insertion portion 528b2. Auxiliary protrusion 528b3, a rib portion 528b4 formed along the side edge of the main body portion 581b1 near the other side shaft support hole 526 and projecting toward the back side, and an end portion of the rib portion 528b4. It mainly includes an inclined portion 528b5 that is inclined with respect to the projecting direction.

The main body portion 528b1 is formed with a length that covers the driven side arm member 530 in a front view in the assembled state (see FIG. 48).

The auxiliary protrusion 528b3 is a portion inserted into the second pin fastening hole 527b2 formed adjacent to the second fastening hole 527b1 of the main body plate portion 521, whereby the bridge member 528 is inserted into the main body plate portion 521. 2 points are supported. Therefore, the bridge member 528 can be fixed to the main body plate portion 521 so as not to rotate relative to each other.

Since the rib portion 528b4 is not formed up to the tip of the main body portion 528b1, contact with the driven side arm member 530 is suppressed at the retracted position (see FIG. 48), and the driven side arm is suppressed at the overhanging position (see FIG. 50). It is formed in such a manner that it easily comes into contact with the member 530. The details will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 43, the second bridge member 528b has a width of a portion overlapping the driven side arm member 530 rather than a width of a portion of the main body portion 528b1 (see FIG. 41) fastened to the drive side arm member 520. The one is formed narrower. As a result, when the driven side arm member 530 of the second bridge member 528b comes into contact with the second bridge member 528b, it is possible to prevent the second bridge member 528b from twisting about the longitudinal direction (flexion along the longitudinal direction). Can be made easier).

Therefore, when the driven side arm member 530 and the second bridge member 528b come into contact with each other, it is possible to prevent the second bridge member 528b from being twisted and deformed, and the mode of deformation can be limited. In this case, since the arrangement position of the portion (second pin fastening hole 527b2) for preventing the second bridge member 528b from turning over can be limited, the configuration of the second bridge member 528b can be simplified. .. That is, it is not necessary to form the auxiliary protrusion 528b3 (see FIG. 41) in the lateral direction of the second bridge member 528b with respect to the insertion portion 528b2 (see FIG. 41).

The driven side arm member 530 is a member formed of a resin material, and is one end of a main body plate portion 531 formed in a long plate shape and the main body plate portion 531 (the end portion on the right side when viewed from the front). ), It is bored in the front-rear direction at the one-side shaft support hole 532 through which the first shaft portion 512a is inserted, and at the other end (the left end when viewed from the front) of the main body plate portion 531. The first shaft portion 542a of the moving member 540 is mainly provided with an other side shaft support hole 533 that is pivotally supported via a collar.

The front side surface of the main body plate portion 531 is formed on the same plane as the front side surface of the drive side arm member 520.

The moving member 540 has a main body portion 541 formed from a long block shape in the left-right direction and a curved surface whose upper surface is convex downward, and a columnar protrusion on the back side on the right side of the main body portion 541 when viewed from the rear. It mainly includes a pair of shaft support portions 542 to be provided, and an alignment portion 543 projecting from the right side surface of the main body portion 451.

In the present embodiment, the moving member 540 is formed to be thicker toward the side where the pair of moving members 540 abut (right side in FIG. 42A), so that the center of gravity G of the moving member 540 is a pair of moving members. The member 540 is formed on the abutting side and at a position separated from the driven side arm member 530 on the front side (see FIG. 42).

The shaft support portion 542 is formed at the same distance between the shafts as the distance between the shafts of the first shaft portion 512a and the second shaft portion 512b, and in the state shown in FIG. 38, the relative arrangement of the pair of shafts is first. It is formed from a pair of shafts formed in the same arrangement as the shafts of the shaft portion 512a and the second shaft portion 512b, and mainly includes a first shaft portion 542a and a second shaft portion 542b in order from the top.

The first shaft portion 542a is a portion inserted into the other side shaft support hole 533 of the driven side arm member 530, and the second shaft portion 542b is inserted into the other side shaft support hole 526 of the drive side arm member 520. This is the part.

Here, as described above, the distance between the shaft support holes 522 and 526 at both ends of the drive side arm member 520 and the distance between the shaft support holes 532 and 533 at both ends of the driven side arm member 530 are Be the same. Further, the relative arrangement of the first shaft portion 512a and the second shaft portion 512b arranged on the base member 510 and the first shaft portion 542a and the second shaft portion 542b arranged on the moving member 540 is arranged. The relationship (direction and distance of the straight line connecting the axes) is the same. Therefore, a parallel link is formed by the drive side arm member 520 and the driven side arm member 530, and the posture of the moving member 540 is not changed during the swing of the drive side arm member 520 (FIGS. 48 to 50).

The alignment portion 543 is a portion for aligning the relative positional relationship of the pair of moving members 540 when the moving member 540 is arranged at the overhanging position. The moving member 540 on the right side of the front view (see FIG. 8) is formed with a recess that is recessed so as to accept the positioning portion 543 of the moving member 540 on the left side.

The drive device 550 includes a drive motor 551 that is fastened and fixed to the front side of the front plate member 560 with the drive shaft facing the rear side, a drive gear 552 that is pivotally supported by the drive motor 551, and one in the drive gear 552. It mainly includes a transmission gear 553 in which the first gear portion 553a of the first stage is meshed and the second gear portion 553b of the second stage is meshed with the gear portion 523 of the drive side arm member 520.

The transmission gear 553 is a member in which two gear teeth having different diameters are coaxially formed, and is a first gear portion 553a formed from a large-diameter gear arranged to face the base member 510, and a first gear portion 553a thereof. A second gear portion 553b formed of gears having a diameter smaller than that of the first gear portion 553a arranged on the front side of the gear portion 551a, and bored at the center of the first gear portion 553a and the second gear portion 553b. It is mainly provided with a shaft support hole 553c that is pivotally supported by the third shaft portion 512c of the base member 510.

The front plate member 560 has a main body portion 561 formed in a horizontally long plate shape, a holding portion 562 recessed in the same arrangement as the arrangement of the shaft support portion 512 of the base member 510, and a fastening portion 524a of the sensor passing plate 524. A guide hole portion 563 formed in an arc shape along the movement locus of the above is mainly provided.

The holding portion 562 is recessed with a diameter equivalent to the diameter of each cylinder of the shaft support portion 512, and the tip end portion of each shaft portion of the shaft support portion 512 is internally fitted and fixed. As a result, the shaft support portion 512 can be supported at both ends, so that the shaft can be stabilized. Therefore, the operation of the drive side arm member 520, the driven side arm member 530, and the transmission gear 553 can be stabilized.

The guide hole portion 563 is an arc-shaped elongated hole through which a raised portion 521a projecting from the drive side arm member 520 toward the sensor passing plate 524 is inserted, and extends in the front-rear direction at the lower end portion. A stopper wall portion 563a is provided. As a result, even if the drive side arm member 520 is displaced in the radial direction with respect to the second shaft portion 512b, the raised portion 521a of the drive side arm member 520 is brought into contact with the guide hole portion 563 and movement is restricted. , The position of the drive side arm member 520 can be stabilized.

The stopper wall portion 563a is a wall portion for preventing the moving member 540 from swinging beyond the movable range when the moving member 540 is moved toward the overhanging position (see FIG. 43). is there. When the moving member 540 moves to the right from the state shown in FIG. 43, the stopper wall portion 563a and the raised portion 521a (see FIG. 40) to which the sensor passing plate 524 and the sensor passing plate 524 are fastened and fixed are brought into contact with each other. To. The stopper wall portion 563a extends not only to the front side but also to the back side. As a result, the contact area between one end of the drive side arm member 520 and the stopper wall portion 563a can be increased, and the raised portion 521a to which the sensor passing plate 524 and the sensor passing plate 524 are fastened and fixed at the time of contact can be increased. The stress applied to can be reduced.

The end portion of the movable range of the swinging operation unit 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 42 and 43. 42 (a) and 43 are front views of the rocking motion unit 500, and FIG. 42 (b) is a side view of the rocking motion unit 500 in the direction of the arrow XXXIIb of FIG. 42 (a). Note that FIG. 42 shows a state in which the moving member 540 is arranged in the retracted position, and FIG. 43 shows a state in which the moving member 540 is arranged in the overhanging position.

As shown in FIGS. 42 and 43, the posture of the moving member 540 is not changed when the moving member 540 swings from the retracted position to the overhanging position. Therefore, when the pair of left and right moving members 540 (see FIG. 6) are close to each other (both are swung to the overhanging position), the side surfaces arranged to face each other (the right side surface in FIG. 43) remain parallel. Since they are brought close to each other, it is possible to easily fit the alignment portion 543 to unite the pair of moving members 540.

In a state where the moving member 540 is arranged at the overhanging position, the bridge member 528 is placed on the front side surface of the driven side arm member 530. Further, since the distance between the drive side arm member 520 and the driven side arm member 530 is narrowed, the drive side arm member 520 and the driven side arm member 530 can be brought into contact with each other when swinging beyond the overhanging position. As a result, the swing of the drive side arm member 520 can be stopped.

As shown in FIGS. 42 (a) and 42 (b), the center of gravity G of the moving member 540 is formed on the side (right side of FIG. 42) where the pair of moving members 540 are in contact with each other in the left-right direction, and is formed in the front-rear direction. In the direction, it is formed so as to be separated from the driving side arm member 520 and the driven side arm member 530.

As shown in FIG. 43, the bridge member 528 fastened and fixed to the front side of the drive side arm member 520 is extended so as to cover the front side of the driven side arm member 530.

Here, with reference to FIG. 44, the difference in the fastening portion between the first bridge member 528a and the second bridge member 528b will be described. Due to the difference at the fastening portion, the ease of turning over the first bridge member 528a and the second bridge member 528b from the drive side arm member 520 differs.

Here, "turning over" means that the bridge member 528 receives a force from the driven side arm member 530 toward the upper side of FIG. 44 and is peeled off from the driving side arm member 520.

44 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the drive side arm member 520, the driven side arm member 530 and the first bridge member 528a in the line XXXXIVa-XXXVa of FIG. 43, and FIG. 44 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the first bridge member 528a. It is sectional drawing of the drive side arm member 520, the driven side arm member 530, and the second bridge member 528b in -XXXXIVb line.

First, as a first difference, as shown in FIG. 44 (b), the second fastening hole 527b1 and the second pinning hole 527b2 for receiving the second bridge member 528b are different from the first fastening hole portion 527a. The base portion 527b3 is formed. As a result, the second embedding width Wb1, which is the embedding width of the insertion portion 528b2 into the second fastening hole 527b1, is longer than the first embedding width Wa1, which is the embedding width of the insertion portion 528a2 into the first fastening hole 527a1. Will be done. Therefore, the second bridge member 528b can be fixed more firmly than the first bridge member 528a (the second bridge member 528b is less likely to be turned over than the first bridge member 528a).

The second difference is that the first overhang width Wa2, which is the overhang width of the insertion portion 528b2 from the main body plate portion 521 in the fastened and fixed state, is the overhang width of the insertion portion 528a2 from the main body plate portion 521. It is shortened as compared with the second overhang width Wb2. Therefore, the second bridge member 528b can suppress the deformation in the vicinity of the fastening position as compared with the first bridge member 528a (the second bridge member 528b is the first bridge member 528a. It's hard to turn over in comparison).

The third difference is that the first fastening hole 527a1 is formed on the opposite side of the driven side arm member 530 with respect to the first pin fastening hole 527a2 (see FIG. 44A), but the second fastening hole 527b1 is the first. The 2-pin fastening hole 527b2 is formed on the side close to the driven side arm member 530 as a reference (see FIG. 44 (b)).

In this case, the driven side arm member 530 moves (deflects and deforms, falls and deforms) in a direction close to the bridge member 528 (upward in FIG. 44), and is fastened when a load is applied to the bridge member from the driven side arm member 530. There is a difference in how to endure in the part.

That is, when the main body portion 528a1 of the first bridge member 528a is pushed by the driven side arm member 530 and the main body portion 528a1 bends from the insertion portion 528a2, the auxiliary protrusion portion 528a3 separates from the drive side arm member 520 (FIG. 44 (a)). Therefore, the frictional resistance between the side surface of the auxiliary protrusion 528a3 and the inner surface of the first pin fastening hole 527a2 causes a resistance force against the turning of the main body portion 528a1.

On the other hand, when the main body portion 528b1 of the second bridge member 528b is pushed by the driven side arm member 530 and the main body portion 528b1 bends from the insertion portion 528b2, the seat surface of the auxiliary protrusion portion 528b3 is pressed against the drive side arm member 520. (See FIG. 44 (b)). Therefore, in addition to the frictional resistance between the side surface of the auxiliary protrusion 528b3 and the inner side surface of the second pin fastening hole 527b2, the seating surface of the auxiliary protrusion 528b3 is the side surface of the main body plate portion 521 on the front side (upper side of FIG. 44B). By being pressed against the body, resistance to turning over of the main body 528b1 is generated.

Therefore, the resistance to the turning of the second bridge member 528b can be increased as compared with the resistance to the turning of the first bridge member 528a.

The distance between the axes of the second fastening hole 527b1 and the second pinning hole 527b2 is formed longer than the distance between the axes of the first fastening hole 527a1 and the first pin fastening hole 527a2.

Due to the difference from the first to the third described above, the same load is applied from the driven side arm member 530 to either the first bridge member 528a or the second bridge member 528b toward the front side (upper part of FIG. 44). In this case, the second bridge member 528b has a resistance force at the root portion against turning (a force that can withstand turning at the fastening position with the drive side arm member 520) as compared with the first bridge member 528a. growing.

With reference to FIG. 45, a mode of contact between the driven side arm member 530 and the bridge member 528 when the driven side arm member 530 bends and deforms will be described. 45 (a) is a partial side view of the swinging operation unit 500 in the direction of arrow XXXVa of FIG. 43, and FIGS. 45 (b) and 45 (c) are driven sides from the state of FIG. 45 (a). It is a partial side view of the rocking operation unit 500 which showed the state which the arm member 530 bends to the front side in time series.

In addition, in FIG. 45A, a state in which the drive side arm member 520 and the driven side arm member 530 are parallel in the longitudinal direction is shown, and in FIG. 45B, the driven side arm member 530 is on the front side (FIG. 45). (B) The state in which the first bridge member 528a is in contact with the bent first bridge member 528a is shown on the left side), and in FIG. 45 (c), the driven side arm member 530 is further bent toward the front side from the state of FIG. 45 (b). The state of contact with the bridge member 528b is illustrated. Further, in FIG. 45, the base member 510, the moving member 540, and the front plate member 560 are virtually illustrated by imaginary lines.

As shown in FIG. 45, the first bridge member 528a is arranged closer to the moving member 540 as compared with the second bridge member 528b. Therefore, when the upper end of the driven side arm member 530 bends to the front side (left side in FIG. 45) due to factors such as the weight of the moving member 540 and contact with other members, the first bridge first when the amount of bending is small. The driven side arm member 530 abuts on the bridge member 528a (see FIG. 45B). After that, when the amount of bending of the driven side arm member 530 increases, the first bridge member 528a bends and deforms, and the second bridge member 528b comes into contact with the driven side arm member 530 (see FIG. 45 (c)).

That is, since the displacement of the driven side arm member 530 is larger in the portion in contact with the first bridge member 528a, a larger load is applied to the first bridge member 528a as compared with the second bridge member 528b. Be done.

Here, when the resistance to the deflection deformation of the first bridge member 528a is as large as that of the second bridge member 528b, the first bridge member 528a is flexed and deformed even if the amount of deflection of the driven side arm member 530 is large. It may not (instead, the drive side arm member 520 bends). In this case, the driven side arm member 530 and the second bridge member 528b do not come into contact with each other, and the load from the driven side arm member 530 is received only by the first bridge member 528a. The durability of the member 528a is reduced.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the first bridge member 528a is fastened to the drive side arm member 520 in a manner in which the first bridge member 528a is more easily turned over at the root portion than the second bridge member 528b. Therefore, the first bridge member 528a is likely to be turned over (deforms with respect to the drive side arm member 520 near the root) before the driven side arm member 530 comes into contact with the second bridge member 528b.

In addition, the first bridge member 528a is formed to be narrower in the lateral direction and the plate thickness is formed to be the same as that of the second bridge member 528b (see FIG. 44). That is, the cross-sectional coefficient of the second bridge member 528b in the same direction is larger than the cross-sectional coefficient of the first bridge member 528a in the direction of the load applied from the driven side arm member 530 to the bridge member 528. Will be done. Therefore, the first bridge member 528a is more likely to bend in the vertical direction (left-right direction in FIG. 45A) in the lateral direction than the second bridge member 528b.

As a result, the pair of bridge members 528 can abut on the driven side arm member 530 and receive a load (see FIG. 45 (c)), and the load can be distributed and burdened on the pair of bridge members 528. Therefore, the durability of the first bridge member 528a and the second bridge member 528b can be improved.

The method in which the pair of bridge members 528 receive the load from the driven side arm member 530 is not limited to bending the first bridge member 528a. For example, by making the first overhang width Wa2 (see FIG. 44) of the first bridge member 528a longer than that of the present embodiment, the driven side arm member 530 and the first bridge have a deflection amount of FIG. 45 (b). The bridge member 528a may not be brought into contact with the bridge member 528a, and the pair of bridge members 528 may start to come into contact with the driven side arm member 530 at the same time with the amount of deflection shown in FIG. 45 (c). In this case, both the first bridge member 528a and the second bridge member 528b can receive the load from the driven side arm member 530, and the load is applied to the first bridge member 528a and the second bridge member 528b. Can be distributed and burdened.

On the other hand, when the amount of deflection is small (see FIG. 45B), the driven side arm member 530 does not come into contact with any of the pair of bridge members 528, so that it is difficult to suppress the bending of the driven side arm member 530. (Up to the amount of deflection in FIG. 45 (c), the deflection is suppressed only by the rigidity of the driven side arm member 530).

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, while the amount of bending of the driven side arm member 530 is small, the bending can be suppressed by bringing the driven side arm member 530 into contact with the first bridge member 528a (FIG. 45). See (b)). Further, as described above, when the amount of bending of the driven side arm member 530 becomes large, the first bridge member 528a is bent and deformed, and the driven side arm member 530 and the second bridge member 528b are brought into contact with each other. As a result, the pair of bridge members 528 can receive the load from the driven side arm member 530, and the load can be distributed to the pair of bridge members 528 to bear the load. Therefore, the first bridge member 528a and The durability of the second bridge member 528b can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 46, the front-rear relationship between the drive side arm member 520, the driven side arm member 530, and the bridge member 528 will be described. FIG. 46 is a cross-sectional view of the drive-side arm member 520 and the driven-side arm member 530 in the line XXXXIV-XXXXIV of FIG. 43. In FIG. 46, only the cross-sectional view of the long portion of the drive side arm member 520 and the driven side arm member 530 is shown for easy understanding, and the shapes of the end portions of the arm members 520 and 530 are omitted. To do.

As shown in FIG. 46, the drive side arm member 520 and the driven side arm member 530 are formed so that the front side surface (the side surface above FIG. 46) is substantially the same plane, and the bridge member 528 is the driven side arm member 530. It is put on the front side of. Therefore, the driven side arm member 530 moves to the front side along the arrow B1 (deflection deformation or tilt deformation), or the drive side arm member 520 moves to the back side along the arrow B2 (deflection deformation or tilt deformation). Alternatively, it is possible to prevent the drive side arm member 520 from rotating (twisting and deforming) along the arrow B3. That is, by bringing the bridge member 528 and the driven side arm member 530 into contact with each other, the relative movement (deformation) between the drive side arm member 520 and the driven side arm member 530 can be suppressed.

Here, the moving member 540 (see FIG. 43) is arranged on the front side of the driving side arm member 520 and the driven side arm member 530, and the center of gravity G of the moving member 540 is formed on the front side of each arm member 520, 530. (See FIG. 42). As described above, since the center of gravity G of the moving member 540 is formed closer to the side where the pair of moving members 540 abut (right side in FIG. 43), the driven side arm member 530 is in front of the driving side arm member 520. There is a great risk of falling. On the other hand, when the driven side arm member 530 tilts forward, the driven side arm member 530 of the bridge member 528 is supported (contacted) from the front side. As a result, it is possible to prevent the driven side arm member 530 from moving to the front side (the front side of the paper in FIG. 43), and accordingly, it is possible to prevent the moving member 540 from moving to the front side.

Since the drive-side arm member 520 is a member to which the driving force is transmitted, the drive-side arm member 520 may wobble in the swing axis direction (vertical direction in FIG. 46) depending on the transmission condition. The wobbling can be suppressed by the contact between the bridge member 528 and the driven side arm member 530.

On the other hand, when the drive side arm member 520 moves to the front side (deflection deformation or tilt deformation) along the arrow B1 or rotates clockwise (twist deformation) in the opposite direction of the arrow B3, the bridge Since the bridge member 528 is moved in a direction away from the driven side arm member 530, it becomes difficult to suppress the movement of the drive side arm member 520. Therefore, it is preferable that there is a mechanism for preventing these movements. Next, with reference to FIG. 47, the drive side arm member 520 is suppressed from moving toward the front side (deflection movement or tilting deformation) along the arrow B1, or the drive side arm member 520 is in the opposite direction of the arrow B3. A mechanism for suppressing clockwise rotation (torsional deformation) will be described.

FIG. 47 is a partial cross-sectional view of the swinging operation unit 500 in the line XXXXV-XXXXV of FIG. 43. As shown in FIG. 47, one end of the drive side arm member 520 is brought into contact with the transmission gear 553 from the front side (upper side of FIG. 47). That is, the gear portion 523 is brought into contact with the front side of the first gear portion 553a of the transmission gear 553, and in addition, the umbrella portion 523a is brought into contact with the front side of the second gear portion 553b. Here, regardless of the arrangement of the drive side arm member 520, the transmission gear 553 is arranged on the opposite side of the driven side arm member 530 with respect to the straight line connecting the shaft support holes 522 and 526 formed at both ends of the drive arm member 520. It is installed (see FIGS. 48 to 50).

Therefore, when the side of the drive side arm member 520 close to the driven side arm member 530 moves to the front side (twisting and deforming in the opposite direction of the arrow B3 in FIG. 46), the gear portion 523 is pressed against the first gear portion 553a. The umbrella portion 523a is moved in the direction of being pressed against the second gear portion 553b. In this case, the deformation resistance of the drive side arm member 520 increases. Therefore, the movement (twisting deformation) of the drive side arm member 520 in the opposite direction of the arrow B3 in FIG. 46 can be suppressed.

As shown in FIG. 47, the sensor passing plate 524 is arranged on the front side of the front plate member 560 at the tip of one end of the drive side arm member 520. As a result, when the other end (right side of FIG. 47) of the drive side arm member 520 moves to the front side along the arrow B1 (deflection deformation or tilt deformation), one end sandwiching the second shaft portion 512b is sandwiched. The deformation resistance of the drive-side arm member 520 can be increased by the sensor passing plate 524 coming into contact with the front plate member 560. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the other end of the drive-side arm member 520 from moving in the direction of the arrow B1 (deflection deformation or tilting deformation).

As shown in FIG. 47, the collar member 525 is formed to have a thickness substantially equal to the thickness of the first gear portion 553a of the transmission gear 553. As shown in FIG. 41, the color member 525 is formed in a shape smaller than the outer shape of one end of the drive side arm member 520 in the front view. Therefore, the color member 525 causes the base member 510 and the drive side arm member. The contact area with 520 can be suppressed. Therefore, the contact resistance when the drive side arm member 520 is swung can be suppressed, and the drive motor 551 can be downsized.

Next, the swinging operation of the driving side arm member 520 and the driven side arm member 530 will be described with reference to FIGS. 48 to 50. 48 to 50 are front views of the drive side arm member 520 and the driven side arm member 530. In FIG. 48, the drive side arm member 520 and the driven side arm member 530 are arranged at the retracted position as in FIG. 42, and in FIG. 49, the drive side arm member 520 and the driven side arm are arranged from the state of FIG. 48. A state in which the member 530 is swung by a predetermined amount is shown in FIG. 50, and a state in which the drive side arm member 520 and the driven side arm member 530 are arranged at the overhanging positions is shown in FIG. Further, in FIGS. 48 to 50, the outer shape of the moving member 540 is shown by an imaginary line, the sensor passing plate 524 is not shown, and a part of the collar member 525 and the first gear portion 553a of the transmission gear 553 is shown by a hidden line. In addition to being shown, the umbrella portion 523a of the gear portion 523 is partially omitted so that the gear teeth can be visually recognized.

As shown in FIGS. 48 to 50, the distance between the driving side arm member 520 and the driven side arm member 530 is shortened from the retracted position to the overhanging position. Therefore, the area covered by the driven side arm member 530 increases as the bridge member 528 moves from the retracted position to the overhanging position, and the driven side arm member 530 moves to the front side and abuts on the bridge member 528. The resistance force generated from the bridge member 528 can be increased.

As shown in FIG. 48, the rib portion 528a4 of the first bridge member 528a and the rib portion 528b4 of the second bridge member 528b are formed on one side shaft support hole 532 and the other side shaft support hole of the driven side arm member 530. It is formed below the straight line connecting 533. Therefore, in the retracted position, the driven side arm member may change its posture in such a manner that the portion above the straight line connecting the one-side shaft support hole 532 and the other-side shaft support hole 533 falls to the front side (front side in FIG. 48). The distance between the 530 and the bridge member 528 can be kept large. As a result, when the drive side arm member 520 and the driven side arm member 530 start from the retracted position, the driven side arm member 530 falls forward and comes into contact with the bridge member 528, so that the drive side arm member 520 and the driven side It is possible to prevent the swing resistance of the arm member 530 from increasing.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 50, the rib portion 528a4 of the first bridge member 528a and the rib portion 528b4 of the second bridge member 528b are arranged at intermediate positions in the longitudinal direction of the driven side arm member 530. .. Therefore, at the overhanging position, the distance between the driven side arm member 530 and the bridge member 528, which may change in posture in a manner of tilting and deforming starting from the one-side shaft support portion 532, can be narrowed. As a result, at the overhanging position, the driven side arm member 530 and the bridge member 528 can be brought into contact with each other while the amount of deformation of the driven side arm member 530 is small.

That is, the rib portions 528a4 and 528b4 suppress the swing resistance when the drive side arm member 520 and the driven side arm member 530 start from the retracted position, and the driven side arm member 530 is arranged at the overhanging position. In the state, it is possible to make the driven side arm member 530 and the bridge member 528 come into contact with each other while the amount of deformation of the driven side arm member 530 is small.

Further, at least a part of the bridge member 528 is arranged on the front side of the driven side arm member 530 while the drive side arm member 520 is arranged from the retracted position to the overhanging position. .. As a result, the driven side arm member 530 moves in the axial direction while the bridge member 528 is not arranged on the front side of the driven side arm member 530, and the side surface of the driven side arm member 530 is arranged to face the drive side arm member 520. It is possible to prevent the bridge member 528 from coming into contact with the bridge member 528. Further, since the driven side arm member 530 can always come into contact with the bridge member 528, the effect of suppressing the axial misalignment of the driven side arm member 530 can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 50, in a state where the moving member 540 is arranged at the overhanging position, the driving side arm member 520 and the driven side arm member 530 are on the side where the pair of moving members 540 are in contact with each other (right side in FIG. 50). Take an inclined posture on the opposite side of. Therefore, it may be necessary to keep the drive motor 551 operating in order to maintain the arrangement of the moving member 540 (to prevent the drive side arm member 520 from rotating counterclockwise when viewed from the front).

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the center of gravity G of the moving member 540 is formed on the side where the pair of moving members 540 abut (right side in FIG. 50). Therefore, in the state where the moving member 540 is arranged at the overhanging position, the driving side arm member 520 and the driven side arm member 530 receive a load from the moving member 540 in the clockwise direction in the front view. As a result, it is possible to prevent the drive side arm member 520 from rotating counterclockwise when viewed from the front, so that it is not necessary to continue operating the drive motor 551 while the moving member 540 is arranged at the overhanging position. The power consumption of the drive motor 551 can be reduced.

As described above, the transmission gear 553 and the gear portion 523 formed at one end of the drive side arm member 520 are brought into contact with each other in the front-rear direction. As shown in FIGS. 48 to 50, the contact surfaces of the transmission gear 553 and the gear portion 523 are moved in substantially the same direction (left side of FIG. 48) during the swinging operation of the drive side arm member 520.

That is, the driving force required for the rotation of the gear portion 523 is not only from the meshing with the second gear portion 553b of the transmission gear 553, but also from the side surface of the first gear portion 553a (front side in FIG. 48) and the gear. It can also be transmitted by contact with the side surface on the back side of the portion 523. This can be rephrased as reducing the swing resistance of the drive side arm member 520. As a result, the driving force required for the drive motor 551 can be reduced, and the drive motor 551 can be miniaturized.

As shown in FIG. 48, the collar member 525 has a longitudinal direction connecting the pair of fastening portions 525c and a lateral direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction, and the longitudinal direction is a posture along the longitudinal direction of the drive side arm member 520. It is fastened and fixed to the drive side arm member 520. As a result, the collar member 525 and the base member are contacted along the longitudinal direction of the drive side arm member 520 as compared with the range in which the collar member 525 and the base member 510 are in contact with each other along the lateral direction of the drive side arm member 520. The range of contact with 510 is increased.

Therefore, the other end of the drive-side arm member 520 (the left end in FIG. 48) is inserted into the one-side shaft support hole 522 in the front-rear direction (see FIG. 40) starting from the second shaft portion 512b (see FIG. 40). The range in which the color member 525 is pressed against the base member 510 (see FIG. 40) can be increased when the color member 525 is deformed in the vertical direction of the paper surface. As a result, the deformation resistance of the drive side arm member 520 can be increased.

Further, the straight line L connecting the central axis of the collar member 525 and the central axis of the transmission gear 535 always intersects the circular outer shape of the main body portion 525a of the collar member 525. That is, it does not intersect with the outer shape of the fastening portion 525c. As a result, the distance between the shafts of the collar member 525 and the transmission gear 553 can be suppressed to the minimum length.

In other words, since it is not necessary to insert the fastening portion 525c arranged in the longitudinal direction of the collar member 525 between the central axis of the collar member 525 and the central axis of the transmission gear 553, the central axis of the collar member 525 and the transmission gear The distance between the axes of 553 and the central axis can be shortened. The distance between the axes is at least a distance at which the main body portion 525a of the collar member 525 and the transmission gear 553 can be arranged to face each other. As a result, the degree of freedom in the arrangement of the collar member 525 can be improved, and the degree of freedom in the arrangement of the drive side arm member 520 can be improved.

Further, even when the distance between the central axis of the collar member 525 and the central axis of the transmission gear 555 is the same, when the fastening portion 525c is inserted between the central axis of the collar member 525 and the central axis of the transmission gear 553. In comparison, the contact area between the first gear portion 553a of the transmission gear 553 and the drive side arm member 520 in the axial direction can be increased.

Next, the rocking operation unit 2500 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 51. In the first embodiment, the case where the end portion of the bridge member 528 of the swinging motion unit 500 is not fixed has been described, but in the swinging motion unit 2500 in the second embodiment, the main body portion 2561 of the front plate portion 2560 is used. A thickening portion 2561a for accommodating the tip of the bridge member 2528 is provided. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

51 (a) and 51 (b) are partial front views of the swinging operation unit 2500 in the second embodiment. Note that FIG. 51 (a) shows a state in which the moving member 540 is arranged in the retracted position, and FIG. 51 (b) shows a state in which the moving member 540 is arranged in the overhanging position. In 51 (a) and 51 (b), the moving member 540 is illustrated by an imaginary line.

As shown in FIGS. 51 (a) and 51 (b), the main body portion 2528a of the bridge member 2528 is formed over the width direction of the driven side arm member 530. As a result, when the driven side arm member 530 moves to the front side (front side of the paper in FIG. 51) (falling deformation or bending deformation), the area of the main body portion 2528a that comes into contact with the driven side arm member 530 is set to the first embodiment. It can be expanded in comparison, and the movement of the driven side arm member 530 can be suppressed.

The main body portion 2561 of the front plate member 2560 is formed by thickening the thickening portion 2561a in the front-rear direction (vertical direction on the paper surface of FIG. 51) at the upper end portion thereof, and recessing downward from the upper end surface of the thickening portion 2561a. The accommodating portion 2561b is provided.

The accommodating portion 2561b is a recess that is recessed in a state of being closed on all sides in a top view, and is a recess in which the tip portion of the bridge member 2528 is accommodated in a state where the moving member 540 is arranged at the overhanging position. Is. The inner surface of the accommodating portion 2561b includes a movement locus of the tip portion of the bridge member 2528 (the upper tip portion in FIG. 51 (a)) (the tip portion of the bridge member 2528 is moved during the movement of the moving member 540). It is formed in a mode that does not abut on the inner surface of the accommodating portion 2561b). This prevents the bridge member 2528 from coming into contact with the inner surface of the drive side arm member 2520 in the inner surface of the accommodating portion 2561b while moving the moving member 540 from the retracted position to the overhanging position. can do.

As shown in FIG. 51 (b), the end portion of the bridge member 2528 is accommodated in the accommodating portion 2561b in a state where the moving member 540 is arranged at the overhanging position. Therefore, for example, when the driven side arm member 530 moves to the front side (for example, falls and deforms) and applies a load to the bridge member 2528, the resistance to the load can be improved.

That is, when the tip of the bridge member 2528 is not accommodated in the accommodating portion 2561b, the bridge member 2528 is cantilevered and resistant to the load from the driven side arm member 530 (the load toward the front side in FIG. 51). (The bridge member 2528 is fastened to the drive side arm member 2520). On the other hand, when the tip of the bridge member 2528 is accommodated in the accommodating portion 2561b, a resistance force can be generated by the double-sided support against the load from the driven side arm member 530 (fastening with the driving side arm 2520). Supported by the position and the accommodating portion 2561b). As a result, it is possible to prevent the driven side arm member 530 from moving to the front side.

Further, since the bridge member 2528 is fastened and fixed to the drive side arm member 2520, the tip portion of the bridge member 2528 is accommodated in the accommodating portion 2561b, so that the drive side arm member 2520 is aligned in the front-rear direction. be able to.

In this case, the moving members 540 of the swinging operation unit 2500 formed in pairs on the left and right can be aligned in the front-rear direction, and the pair of moving members 540 are arranged at the overhanging positions (see FIG. 8). In the above, it is possible to prevent the pair of moving members 540 from being displaced relative to each other in the front-rear direction. Since the accommodating portion 2561b is arranged at a position closer to the contact position (see FIG. 8) between the pair of moving members 540 as compared with the driving side arm member 2520, the moving members 540 generated starting from the accommodating portion 2561b It is possible to reduce the misalignment of.

As a result, the effect of correcting the misalignment between the pair of moving members 540 can be ensured, and the pair of moving members 540 can be visually recognized integrally in the state where the pair of moving members 540 are arranged at the overhanging positions, thereby producing an effect. Can be improved.

Next, the rocking operation unit 3500 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 52. In the first embodiment, the case where the outer surface of the umbrella portion 523a of the drive side arm member 520 is formed in an arc shape has been described, but the swinging operation unit 3500 in the third embodiment is stretched outward from the umbrella portion 523a. It is provided with an overhanging portion 3523b to be projected. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

52 (a) to 52 (c) are front views of the swinging operation unit 3500 according to the third embodiment, and FIG. 52 (d) shows swinging along the Ld-Ld line of FIG. 52 (b). It is sectional drawing of the operation unit 3500. In FIG. 52, for ease of understanding, only the base member 3510, the drive side arm member 3520, and the drive device 550 are shown, and the other members are omitted, and the photosensor 514 and the drive of the base member 3510 are shown. The illustration of the sensor passing plate 524 of the side arm member 3520 is omitted.

Further, FIG. 52 (a) shows a state in which the drive side arm member 3520 and the moving member 540 (see FIG. 7) are arranged at the retracted position, and FIG. 52 (b) shows the drive side arm member 3520 and the moving member. The state in which the 540 (see FIG. 7) is rotated by a predetermined angle from the retracted position is shown, and in FIG. 52 (c), the drive side arm member 3520 and the moving member 540 (see FIG. 7) are arranged in the overhanging position. Is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 52, the drive-side arm member 3520 includes an overhanging portion 3523b extending outward in the axial direction from the umbrella portion 523a. The overhanging portion 3523b is arranged below the second shaft portion 512b regardless of the posture of the drive side arm member 3520, and the width between the outer peripheral wall 3516 and the second gear portion 553b of the transmission gear 553. It is formed with the above width (see FIG. 52 (b)). That is, during the swinging operation of the drive-side arm member 3520, either the outer peripheral wall 3516 or the second gear portion 553b of the transmission gear 553 is arranged to face each other on the back surface side of the overhanging portion 3523b.

The base member 3510 includes an outer peripheral wall 3516 formed to be curved along the outer circumference of the umbrella portion 523a on the outer side in the axial direction of the umbrella portion 523a. The outer peripheral wall 3516 is projected from the front side of the main body portion 511 of the base member 3510 to a height equivalent to the front side surface of the second gear portion 553b of the transmission gear 553 (see FIG. 52 (d)).

From these, it is possible to prevent the drive side arm member 3520 from moving (tilting deformation or bending deformation) to the front side starting from the second shaft portion 512b of the shaft support portion 512. That is, the drive-side arm member 3520 moves toward the front side (tilt deformation or flexure deformation) above the second shaft portion 512b due to the weight of the moving member 540 (see FIG. 43), and is below the second shaft portion 512b. In, it moves to the back side (falling deformation or bending deformation). In this case, in addition to the umbrella portion 523a abutting on the front side surface of the transmission gear 553, the overhanging portion 3523b abuts on the front end surface of the outer peripheral wall 3516. As a result, the movement (falling deformation or bending deformation) of the drive side arm member 3520 can be suppressed by abutting at two positions.

Further, as shown in FIG. 52 (c), when the drive side arm member 3520 is arranged at the overhanging position, the drive side arm member is compared with the case where the drive side arm member 3520 is arranged at another position. The contact position between the 3520 and the transmission gear 553 in the front-rear direction can be set to a position separated from the second shaft portion 512b in the shaft radial direction.

That is, when the drive side arm member 3520 is arranged at the overhang position, the umbrella portion 523a is arranged so as to face the front side surface of the gear tooth portion of the second gear portion 553b, while the overhang portion 3523b is arranged at the second gear portion. It is arranged against the front side surface of the main body portion of 553b. In this case, the overhanging portion 3523b can come into contact with the main body portion of the second gear portion 553b in the front-rear direction. Such an arrangement is not seen in FIGS. 52 (a) and 52 (b).

Further, in the state where the drive side arm member 3520 is arranged at the overhanging position, the longitudinal direction of the drive side arm member 3520 is along the vertical direction, so that the weight of the moving member 540 (see FIG. 43) causes the drive side arm member 3520 to move. It is a state in which movement in the front-back direction (falling deformation or bending deformation) is likely to occur with a large width. In the present embodiment, as described above, the contact position between the drive side arm member 3520 and the transmission gear 553 in the front-rear direction can be set to a position separated from the second shaft portion 512b in the shaft radial direction, so that the drive side arm member The resistance to the movement of the 3520 in the front-rear direction can be increased, and the movement can be suppressed.

Next, the combined operation unit 4400 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54. In the first embodiment, the case where the guide hole 424b of the guide plate 424 is a smooth elongated hole without being caught has been described, but the composite operation unit 4400 in the fourth embodiment has a recessed portion on the upper side surface of the guide hole 4424b. 4424c is formed. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 53 is a front view of the combined operation unit 4400 in the fourth embodiment in a state where the main body member 410 is arranged at an intermediate position. In addition, in FIGS. 53 and 54, the illustration of the color member of the slide shaft portion 423e is omitted, and the shaft portion can be visually recognized.

As shown in FIG. 53, when the main body 410 of the composite operation unit 4400 moves downward from the retracted position and is arranged at the intermediate position, the slide shaft portion 423e of the connecting member 423 hits the inner end of the guide hole 4424b. Contact. A recessed portion 4424c, which is a recess capable of accommodating a part of the slide shaft portion 423e, is formed on the upper side surface of the guide hole 4424b arranged directly above the contact position. The recessed portion 4424c is formed in an arc shape, and the radius of curvature of the recessed portion 4424c is formed to be equal to or greater than the radius of the slide shaft portion 423e.

Here, when the main body member 410 moves downward from the retracted position, the shaft support hole 423d arranged at the opposite end of the slide shaft portion 423e of the connecting member 423 moves in the vertical direction. Therefore, when the slide shaft portion 423e of the connecting member 423 abuts against the inner end portion of the guide hole 4424b and rebounds, the shaft support hole 423d rebounds in the vertical direction. Therefore, the slide shaft portion 423e also bounces upward due to the momentum of the bounce in the vertical direction.

The effect of the recessed portion 4424c will be described with reference to FIG. 54. 54 (a) and 54 (b) are partial front views of the combined operation unit 4400. FIG. 54 (a) shows a state immediately before the slide shaft portion 423e of the connecting member 423 abuts on the inner end of the guide hole 4424b, and FIG. 54 (b) shows the slide shaft portion 423e of the connecting member 423. The state immediately after abutting on the inner end of the guide hole 4424b is shown. In FIG. 54, the slide lever 473, the solenoid 474, the wiring guide arm 480, and the like are not shown for ease of understanding, and the moving directions of the opposite ends of the slide shaft portion 423e and the slide shaft portion 423e. Are illustrated by arrows C41 to C44.

As shown in FIG. 54 (a), when the main body member 410 is moved downward and the end portion of the connecting member 423 opposite to the slide shaft portion 423e is moved downward along the arrow C42, the slide shaft portion is moved downward. The 423e abuts on the lower side surface of the guide hole 4424b and slides along the arrow C41. Therefore, the slide shaft portion 423e is not accommodated in the recessed portion 4424c.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 54B, the slide shaft portion 423e abuts against the inner end of the guide hole 4424b and rebounds, and the opposite end of the connecting member 423 of the slide shaft portion 423e is along the arrow C44. When it bounces upward, the slide shaft portion 423e is also pressed upward. In this case, the slide shaft portion 423e abuts on the upper side surface of the guide hole 4424b and tries to slide along the arrow C43. Therefore, the slide shaft portion 423e is housed in the recessed portion 4424c.

Therefore, the slide shaft portion 423e and the recessed portion 4424c can be brought into contact with each other in the left-right direction, which is the elongated direction of the guide hole 4424b. In this case, a large resistance can be generated against the slide shaft portion 423e that tends to move in the elongated direction of the guide hole 4424b.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the slide shaft portion 423e from moving along the left-right direction of the guide hole 4424b. Therefore, the rebound width of the slide shaft portion 423e can be reduced, and the arrangement of the shielding member 420 can be stabilized. By moving the main body member 410 (see FIG. 21) upward by the driving device 460, the slide shaft portion 423e is driven inside the guide hole 4424b in the left-right direction.

Next, the combined operation unit 5400 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 and 56. In the first embodiment, the case where the end portion of the connecting member 423 on the slide shaft portion 423e side is in contact with only the guide plate 424 has been described, but the composite operation unit 5400 in the fifth embodiment is a slide of the connecting member 5423. A leaf spring member 5425, which is a plate-shaped spring member that abuts on the end on the shaft portion 423e side, is formed. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 55 is a rear view of the combined operation unit 5400 in the fifth embodiment in a state where the main body member 410 is arranged in the retracted position. As the main body member 410 moves downward from the retracted position, the slide shaft portion 423e of the connecting member 5423 moves in the left-right direction inside the guide hole 424b of the guide plate 5424.

The connecting member 5423 includes a projecting portion 5423f projecting from an end portion of the rod member 423a on the slide shaft portion 423e side. The projecting portion 5423f is projected vertically upward with the slide shaft portion 423e of the connecting member 5423 arranged at the inner end of the guide hole 424b, and is projected on the right side in the rear view (FIG. 56 (c)). The corners on the right side) are rounded and chamfered, and the corners on the left side when viewed from the rear are formed at right angles.

The guide plate 5424 includes a grip portion 5424c projecting in a U shape on the back surface side of the base plate 424a at the upper outer end of the pair of guide holes 424b. The grip portion 5424c is formed in such a manner that the open side of the U-shaped portion is directed inward in the left-right direction and one end of the leaf spring member 5425 is sandwiched by the inner side surface of the U-shaped portion.

The details of the leaf spring member 5425 will be described with reference to FIG. 56. 56 (a) to 56 (c) are partial rear views of the combined operation unit 5400. In addition, in FIGS. 56 (a) to 56 (c), the movement of the connecting member 5423 is shown in chronological order, and the periphery of the guide hole 424b on the left side of the rear view is partially shown in FIG. 56 (a). In FIG. 56 (b), the main body member 410 (see FIG. 55) is arranged at the retracted position, and in FIG. 56 (b), the main body member 410 is moved from the retracted position to the intermediate position by a predetermined distance. In c), the states in which the main body member 410 is arranged at the intermediate position are illustrated.

For ease of understanding, in FIG. 56, only the decorative member 422, the connecting member 5423, the guide plate 5424, and the leaf spring member 5425 are shown, and the other members are not shown. Further, the decorative member 422 and the connecting member 5423 show only the outer shape, and the illustration of the internal pattern and the like is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 56A, the leaf spring member 5425 is arranged in a posture in which the elongated direction is directed to the left-right direction, and one end thereof is gripped by the grip portion 5424c in a straight plate-like fixed portion 5425a. And the curved portion 5425b which is connected to the other end portion of the fixed portion 5425a and is formed to be curved so as to project toward the connecting member side, and the lateral direction from the end portion inside the curved portion 5425b (right side in FIG. 56A). It mainly includes a fall prevention unit 5425c, which is extended to.

The curved portion 5425b is formed so that the first inclined surface 5425b1 formed on the outer side in the left-right direction and the second inclined surface 5425b2 formed on the inner side in the left-right direction have different inclination angles with respect to the left-right direction. That is, the first inclined surface 5425b1 is gently inclined from the left-right direction (the inclination angle is reduced), and the second inclined surface 5425b2 is sharply inclined from the left-right direction (the inclination angle is increased to near a right angle).

The fall prevention portion 5425c comes into contact with the upper end portion of the projecting portion 5423f in a state where the slide shaft portion 423e of the connecting member 5423 is arranged at the inner end (right side in FIG. 56A) of the guide hole 424b. As a result, even if the end of the leaf spring member 5425 on the opposite side of the grip portion 5424c may hang downward due to deterioration over time or the like, in the state of FIG. 56 (c), the projecting portion 5423f holds the leaf spring member 5425. Since it is lifted, the arrangement relationship between the leaf spring member 5425 and the projecting portion 5423f can be maintained. That is, it is possible to prevent the end portion of the leaf spring member 5425 on the opposite side of the grip portion 5424c from hanging downward.

Here, the change in the direction of the force generated between the projecting portion 5423f and the leaf spring member 5425 during the movement of the connecting member 5423 will be described. When the slide shaft portion 423e of the connecting member 5423 is arranged at the left end of the guide hole 424b, the projecting portion 5423f and the leaf spring member 5425 are separated from each other, so that the projecting portion 5423f and the leaf spring member 5425 are separated from each other. No force is generated (see FIG. 56 (a)).

As the slide shaft portion 423e of the connecting member 5423 moves toward the inside of the guide hole 424b in the left-right direction (right side in FIG. 56A), the posture of the connecting member 5423 changes, and the protruding portion 5423f becomes the leaf spring member 5425. They gradually approach each other and eventually come into contact with each other (see FIG. 56 (b)). The connecting member 5423 continues to move inward in the left-right direction, and the upper end of the projecting portion 5423f is gradually moved upward, so that the free end side of the leaf spring member 5425 (right end side in FIG. 56B) The end gradually moves upward.

When the protruding portion 5423f and the first inclined surface 5425b1 of the curved portion 5425b of the leaf spring member 5425 are in contact with each other, the force F51 applied from the protruding portion 5423f to the leaf spring member 5425 is the first inclined surface 5425b1 of the curved portion 5425b. It is transmitted in the normal direction of. That is, the force F51 faces in the thickness direction of the leaf spring member 5425, that is, in the direction in which the leaf spring member 5425 is bent. In this case, since the component of the force applied to the connecting member 5423 as a reaction of the force F51 is small in the left-right direction, the leaf spring member 5425 causes the slide shaft portion 423e of the connecting member 5423 to move to the right. It is suppressed that the movement of the connecting member 5423 is hindered. As a result, the insertion shaft portion 421c (see FIG. 55) is maintained at the lower end of the guide hole 413 (see FIG. 55) until the main body member 410 (see FIG. 55) reaches the intermediate position. can do.

When the slide shaft portion 423e of the connecting member 5423 reaches the inner end portion in the left-right direction of the guide hole 424b (the end portion on the right side in FIG. 56C) and bounces off, the protruding portion 5423f is the curved portion 5425b of the leaf spring member 5425. The second inclined surface 5425b2 is brought into contact with the surface (see FIG. 56 (c)).

In this case, the force F52 applied from the projecting portion 5423f to the leaf spring member 5425 is transmitted in the normal direction of the second inclined surface 5425b2 of the curved portion 5425b. That is, the force F52 has a large component directed in the longitudinal direction of the leaf spring member 5425, that is, in the longitudinal direction of the leaf spring member 5425.

Here, the leaf spring is easily elastically deformed in the thickness direction, but the leaf spring is unlikely to be elastically deformed in the longitudinal direction. In the present embodiment, the direction of the force F52 can be directed to the longitudinal direction of the leaf spring member 5425 by increasing the inclination angle of the right side surface of the curved portion 5425b to be close to a right angle with respect to the left-right direction. As a result, the resistance force of the leaf spring member 5425 to the rebound of the connecting member 5423 can be increased, and the connecting member 5423 can be prevented from moving. Therefore, the connecting member 5423 can be maintained at the end inside the guide hole 424b (on the right side in FIG. 56C).

Further, as described above, the protruding portion 5423f is chamfered with rounded corners on the right side in the rear view (right side in FIG. 56 (c)), and the left corner in the rear view is formed at a right angle. As a result, when the corner on the right side of the projecting portion 5423f in the rear view abuts on the leaf spring member 5425 (see FIG. 56B), the projecting portion 5423f abuts smoothly (without biting) on the left side of the projecting portion 5423f in the rear view. When the corner abuts on the leaf spring member 5425 (see FIG. 56 (c)), the projecting portion 5423f bites into the leaf spring member 5425. That is, the corner on the left side of the projecting portion 5423f when viewed from the rear is fitted between the second inclined surface 5425b2 of the leaf spring member 5425 and the fall prevention portion 5425c.

By moving the main body member 410 (see FIG. 55) upward by the drive device 460 (see FIG. 21), the slide shaft portion 423e is driven inside the guide hole 4424b in the left-right direction. In this case, the projecting portion 5423f moves away from the curved portion 5425b of the leaf spring member 5425.

Next, the combined operation unit 6400 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 57 and 58. In the first embodiment, the case where the wiring guide arm 480 for guiding the wiring is expanded and contracted by folding is described, but in the composite operation unit 6400 in the sixth embodiment, the wiring guide slide 6480 for guiding the wiring can be expanded and contracted by sliding movement. Is formed in. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 57 is a partial front view of the combined operation unit 6400 in the sixth embodiment in a state where the main body member 410 is arranged at the overhanging position. Note that FIG. 57 shows the extended state of the wiring guide slide 6480. In the extended state of the wiring guide slide 6480, the wiring W arranged inside the wiring guide slide 6480 has few bends and is formed substantially linearly. Therefore, the required length of the wiring W can be suppressed.

The wiring guide slide 6480 is provided in the extending direction of the first guide slide 6481 which is oscillatingly supported around the shaft support portion 472 and the wiring W is inserted therein, and the slide elongated hole 6481b of the first guide slide 6481. A second guide slide 6482 that is slid along the line and the wiring W is inserted inside, and a third guide that is slid along the extending direction of the slide elongated hole 6482b of the second guide slide 6482 and the wiring W is inserted inside. It mainly comprises slide 6483.

The first guide slide 6481 has a rectangular tubular main body portion 6488a in which a substantially rectangular through hole 6481a1 is formed in the longitudinal direction, and a pair of side surfaces (arranged in the front-rear direction) arranged to face each other within the side surfaces of the main body portion 6481a. A pair of slide elongated holes 6481b formed so as to face each other and formed along the longitudinal direction of the main body 6481a, and a shaft support 472 which is formed in the front-rear direction at the end of the main body 6481a. Mainly includes a shaft support hole 6481c and a cylindrical columnar portion 6481d bridged in the front-rear direction to the lower end portion of the through hole 6481a1 of the main body portion 6481a.

The extending direction of the slide elongated hole 6481b is formed in parallel with the lower side surface (the side surface on the left side of FIG. 57) of the main body portion 6481a. The wiring W is wound around the cylindrical portion 6481d from below.

The second guide slide 6482 is a rectangular tubular main body portion 6482a and a main body portion 6482a that is slidably fitted in the through hole 6481a1 of the first guide slide 6781 to form a substantially rectangular through hole 6482a1 in the longitudinal direction. A pair of slide elongated holes 6482b formed facing each other and formed along the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 6482a, and a main body portion 6482a. Mainly includes a pair of projecting portions 6482c that project outward from the front and rear side surfaces of the above and are inserted into the slide elongated holes 6481b of the first guide slide 6481.

The extending direction of the slide elongated hole 6482b and the lower side surface of the main body portion 6482a (the side surface on the left side of FIG. 57) are formed in parallel. The projecting portion 6482c is formed in a cylindrical shape having a diameter slightly smaller than the width of the slide elongated hole 6481b.

In the second guide slide 6482, the projecting portion 6482c is formed so as to be slidable inside the slide slot 6481b of the first guide slide 6488, and the outer surface of the second guide slide 6482 is the main body portion 6481a during the movement. It comes into contact with the inner surface of the through hole 6481a1. That is, the distance from the central axis of the slide elongated hole 6481b of the first guide slide 6481 to the inner surface of the lower side surface (the side surface on the left side of FIG. 57) of the main body portion 6481 is from the central axis of the projecting portion 6482c to the main body portion 6482a. It is formed approximately equal to the distance to the outer surface of the lower side surface. As a result, the posture of the second guide slide 6482 can be stabilized when the second guide slide 6482 is slid with respect to the first guide slide 6488.

The third guide slide 6483 is a rectangular tubular main body portion 6483a that is slidably fitted in the through hole 6482a1 of the second guide slide 6482 and has a substantially rectangular through hole 6483a1 formed in the longitudinal direction, and a main body thereof. It mainly includes a pair of projecting portions 6483b that project outward from the front and rear side surfaces of the portion 6483a and are inserted into the slide elongated holes 6482b of the second guide slide 6482.

In the third guide slide 6483, the projecting portion 6483b is formed so as to be slidable inside the slide elongated hole 6482b of the second guide slide 6482, and the outer surface of the third guide slide 6483 is the main body portion 6482a during the movement. Abuts on the inner surface of the through hole 6482a1. That is, the distance from the central axis of the slide elongated hole 6482b of the second guide slide 6482 to the inner surface of the lower side surface (side surface on the left side of FIG. 57) of the main body portion 6482a is from the central axis of the projecting portion 6483b to the main body portion 6483a. It is formed approximately equal to the distance to the outer surface of the lower side surface. As a result, the posture of the third guide slide 6482 can be stabilized when the third guide slide 6483 is slid with respect to the second guide slide 6482.

Here, the inner surface of the first guide slide 6488 and the outer surface of the second guide slide 6482 are each formed of smooth surfaces, while the inner surface of the second guide slide 6482 and the outer surface of the third guide slide 6483 are formed. It is formed on a rough surface. In this case, the frictional resistance of the slide movement of the second guide slide 6482 with respect to the first guide slide 6481 is formed smaller than the frictional resistance of the slide movement of the third guide slide 6483 with respect to the second guide slide 6482.

As a result, the second guide slide 6482 slides in preference to the third guide slide 6483. That is, when the main body member 410 moves upward from the state of FIG. 57, the second guide slide 6482 is first stored in the first guide slide 6488, and after the storage is completed, the third guide slide 6482 is stored in the second guide slide 6482. 6483 is stored.

58 (a) and 58 (b) are partial front views of the combined operation unit 6400. Note that FIG. 58 (a) shows a state in which the main body member 410 is arranged at an intermediate position (see FIG. 30), and FIG. 58 (b) shows a state in which the main body member 410 is arranged in a retracted position. To.

As shown in FIG. 58, the wiring guide slide 6480 does not have a portion where the wiring W may be sandwiched, and it is possible to prevent the wiring W from being disconnected. Further, since there is no risk of sandwiching the wiring W, the arrangement interval between the wiring W and the inner side surfaces of the guide slides 6481,6482,6483 can be reduced. As a result, the width of the wiring guide slide 6480 in the lateral direction can be suppressed.

With the main body member 410 arranged at the intermediate position, the wiring W is left inside the wiring guide slide 6480 (see FIG. 58 (a)). Therefore, the tension applied to the wiring W can be temporarily removed.

Next, the rocking operation unit 7500 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 59. In the first embodiment, the case where the pair of bridge members 528 is fixed to the drive side arm member 520 has been described, but the rocking operation unit 7500 in the seventh embodiment is the first bridge of the pair of bridge members 7528. The bridge member 7528a is formed so as to be swingable with respect to the drive side arm member 7520. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

59 (a) and 59 (b) are partial front views of the rocking operation unit 7500 according to the seventh embodiment. In addition, FIG. 59 (a) shows a state in which the moving member 540 is arranged in the retracted position, and FIG. 59 (b) shows a state in which the moving member 540 is arranged in the overhanging position. Is illustrated by an imaginary line.

As shown in FIG. 59 (a), the first bridge member 7528a, which is the smaller side of the pair of bridge members 7528, is formed in the shaft support hole 7529 formed in the main body plate portion 7521 of the drive side arm member 7520. It is pivotally supported so that it can swing, and is urged clockwise by a torsion spring (not shown). The main body plate portion 7521 is different from the main body plate portion 521 in the first embodiment except that the formation of the first fastening hole 527a1 corresponding to the first bridge member 7528a is omitted and the shaft support hole 7529 is formed instead. It is formed in the same way. Further, the second bridge member 7528b, which is the larger side of the pair of bridge members 7528, is fastened and fixed to the main body plate portion 7521 of the drive side arm member 7520.

The driven side arm member 7530 is provided so as to project from the front side of the main body plate portion 531 and include a projecting portion 7534 that abuts with the first bridge member 7528a in the swing direction.

Here, the drive side arm member 7520 and the driven side arm member 7530 are relative to the shaft support hole 7529 of the projecting portion 7534 depending on whether they are arranged at the retracted position or the overhanging position. The position changes (similar to the relative movement of the other side shaft support hole 526 and the other side shaft support hole 533 along the longitudinal direction of the drive side arm member 7520).

By swinging the first bridge member 7528a along the projecting portion 7534, the distance between the first bridge member 7528a and the second bridge member 7528b at the overhanging position (see FIG. 59 (b)) is increased. Can be expanded. As a result, when the driven side arm member 7530 bends to the front side, the distance between the positions where it can come into contact with the bridge member 7528 (the end of the first bridge member 7528a and the end of the second bridge member 7528b). Can be expanded. In this case, the length in the longitudinal direction in which the driven side arm member 7530 can freely bend without abuting on the bridge member 7528 can be divided into short lengths, and the amount of bending of the driven side arm member 7530 (in the front-rear direction). The amount of movement of) can be suppressed.

As shown in FIG. 59, the distance between the first bridge member 7528a and the other side shaft support hole 533 can be maintained regardless of whether the moving member 540 is arranged in the retracted position or the overhanging position. it can. Here, the misalignment of the driven side arm member 7530 with respect to the driving side arm member 7520 is likely to occur at the other side shaft support hole 533, which is the connection position with the moving member 540, and the misalignment width is likely to be large. In the present embodiment, it is possible to prevent the first bridge member 7528a from being separated from the other side shaft support hole 533, and to increase the effect of suppressing the displacement of the driven side arm member 7530 with respect to the driving side arm member 7520. Can be done.

Further, when the drive side arm member 7520 and the driven side arm member 7530 are arranged at the retracted position (see FIG. 59 (a)), the first bridge member 7528a is urged by a torsion spring (not shown). It swings in a direction close to the second bridge member 7528b. As a result, the drive side arm member 7520 is moved to the retracted position while the distance between the first bridge member 7528a and the second bridge member 7528b is widened, and the first bridge member 7528a and the other side shaft support hole 533 Can be prevented from interfering with each other.

Next, the game board 8013 in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 60 and 61. In the first embodiment, the case where light is emitted from the light irradiation device 331c to the specific winning opening 65a has been described, but the game board 8013 in the eighth embodiment is an outer rail formed by planting on the base plate 8060. Light is applied to the vicinity of the upper half of 62. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 60 is a front view of the game board 8013 according to the eighth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 60, since the light irradiation device 8610 is arranged outside the outer rail 62, the degree of freedom of decoration of the game area is reduced by the shielding member for partially hiding the light irradiation device 8610. Can be prevented. Further, since the light irradiation device 8610 is arranged in the embedded hole 8013a formed in the game board 8013, it is possible to prevent the light irradiation device 8610 from increasing the thickness of the game board 8013 in the front-rear direction.

From the light irradiation device 8610, light is irradiated to the inside of the game area through the back side of the outer rail 62. A mechanism by which the irradiated light changes the traveling direction to the front side (front side in FIG. 60) will be described with reference to FIG. 61.

FIG. 61 is a partial cross-sectional view of the game board 8013 in the LXI-LXI line of FIG. 60. As shown in FIG. 61, the light irradiation device 8610 mainly includes a main body portion 8611 fixed to the embedding hole 8013a and a light irradiation portion 8612 arranged on the side surface of the main body portion 8611.

The game board 8013 is formed of a light-transmitting resin material, and has an embedding hole 8013a in which a light irradiation device 8610 is arranged, and below the embedding hole 8013a along the back surface of the game board 8013 beyond the outer rail 62 ( A recess that extends to the inside of the game area), and a projection passage 8013b, which is formed at the extended end of the light projection passage 8013b and approaches the front side as it goes downward (inside the game area). It mainly includes a direction changing portion 8013c formed in an inclined manner.

The embedded hole 8013a, the light projecting passage 8013b, and the direction changing portion 8013c can be formed by processing such as cutting and drilling, or by forming a protrusion having an appropriate shape on the resin mold.

The light path E81 emitted from the light irradiation section 8612 is formed inside the light projecting passage 8013b, reaches the direction changing section 8013c and is reflected, so that the traveling direction of the light is on the front side from the path E81 (FIG. 61). It changes to the path E82 toward the left side). Here, since the direction changing portion 8013c that changes the traveling direction of the light is formed by the game board 8013 formed of the light-transmitting resin material, it is inconspicuous and the influence on the decoration of the game area can be reduced. it can. As a result, the degree of freedom in designing the game area can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 61, the light traveling along the path E82 irradiates the nails planted in front of the game board 8013 from below. This makes it possible to brighten the shadow formed below the nail by illuminating the hall. Therefore, it is possible to improve the directing ability of the area below the nail, and it is possible to make the ball easier to see when the ball passes through the area below the nail, and the burden felt by the player due to the difficulty in seeing the ball is eased. be able to.

In particular, since the nail to be planted on the upper part of the game board 8013 is arranged at a position where the player can look up, the light reflected from the nail is directed to the player by irradiating the light from below the nail. be able to. In this way, the nail that defines the flow path of the sphere can be used as a member that produces light.

Since the lower part (lower half) of the nail is less likely to collide with the ball, the effect on the flow of the ball is small even if it is processed. For example, by processing the lower part (lower half) of the nail into a crystal shape, light can be reflected in a plurality of directions, and the effect ability of the nail can be enhanced.

Further, by setting the color of the light emitted from the light irradiation unit 8612 to a color different from the color of the nail (for example, yellow) (for example, red), the nail irradiated with the light can be distinguished from other nails. Can be made easier.

In this case, for example, a plurality of light irradiation devices 8610 may be arranged on the game board 8013 (six in this embodiment, see FIG. 60), and light may be irradiated in order. That is, after the light is irradiated from the leftmost light irradiating device 8610 in the front view, the light is irradiated from the light irradiating device 8610 on the right side (the second from the left end in the front view), and then the light is irradiated on the right side (front). Light may be irradiated from the light irradiation device 8610 (third from the left end in the visual sense), and the same may be continued thereafter.

According to this, the nails planted in the game board 8013 shine in order along the curved arrow R81 by the light emitted from the light irradiating device 8610. For example, when it is more advantageous for the player to hit the right side, the nails to be planted on the game board 8013 are lit in order along the curved arrow R81 so that the player can hit the right side. Can be signaled to. As a result, the nail forming the flow path of the ball is given the effect of telling the player where to drive the ball, so that the attention of the nail can be improved.

The light emitted from the light irradiation device 8610 is not necessarily limited to the nail. For example, the wind turbine arranged on the game board 8613, the through gate 67 (see FIG. 60), and the like may be exposed to light.

Next, the wiring guide arm 9480 according to the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 62 to 64. In the first embodiment, the case where the first guide arm 481 and the second guide arm 482 of the wiring guide arm 480 do not overlap in the front-rear direction except for the shaft support portion has been described, but the wiring guide arm 9480 in the ninth embodiment has been described. , The overhanging front locking portion 9482f arranged on the second guide arm 9482 overlaps with the first guide arm 9481 in the front-rear direction. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted. Further, in FIGS. 62 to 64, the enlarged diameter portion 481c1 and the reduced diameter portion 482b1 are omitted for ease of understanding.

62 (a) is a front view of the first guide arm 9484 according to the ninth embodiment, FIG. 62 (b) is a bottom view of the first guide arm 9481, and FIG. 62 (c) is a detachable front view. It is a perspective view of the locking member 9481f. In FIG. 62 (a), the detachable front locking member 9481f is partially cross-sectionally viewed, and the fitted portion between the attachment portion 9481d and the detachable front locking member 9481f is visible.

As shown in FIG. 62 (a), the first guide arm 9481 has a detachable front locking member 9481f formed detachably on the attachment portion 9781d and a plate-shaped arm portion 9481a from both ends of the straight portion of the attachment portion 9481d. Mainly includes a plate-shaped non-slip plate portion 9481 g extending toward the side and an auxiliary bottom portion 9481h extending from the back side of the other side bottom portion 481e2.

In the plate-shaped arm portion 9481a, the formation of the notch portion 481a1 (see FIG. 25A) is omitted. This is because, in the present embodiment, as will be described later, the detachable front locking member 9481f is molded separately from the attachment portion 9481d, so that the notch portion 481a1 is unnecessary. As a result, the strength of the plate-shaped arm portion 9481a can be ensured.

As shown in FIG. 62A, the attachment portion 9481d includes a fitting recess 9481d1 which is a recess having a semicircular cross section extending in the front-rear direction.

The fitting recess 9481d1 is a recess having a semicircular cross section into which the columnar fitting arm portion 9481f2 of the detachable front locking member 9484f, which will be described later, is fitted, and is a recess in the lateral direction of the attachment portion 9481d (FIG. 62 (a) perpendicular to the paper surface). (Direction) is extended. As a result, the shape for the fitting recess 9481d1 is added to the molding die of the fitting portion 9481d, and the fitting portion 9481d1 is formed by pulling out in one direction (FIG. 62 (a) perpendicular to the paper surface). The 9481d can be easily manufactured.

The fitting recess 9481d1 is formed in a semicircular shape having a radius equal to or slightly smaller than the radius of the fitting arm portion 9481f2. As a result, the fitting arm portion 9481f2 can be fitted into the fitting recess 9481d1, and the detachable front locking member 9481f can be prevented from sliding in the longitudinal direction of the attachment portion 9481d.

In this case, the contact area with respect to the thickness of the fitting arm 9481f2 can be increased and the frictional force can be increased as compared with the case where the attachment arm 9481d and the fitting arm 9481f2 hit each other on a flat surface. Can be done. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the detachable front locking member 9481f from falling off from the attachment portion 9481d.

As shown in FIG. 62 (c), the detachable front locking member 9481f is a plurality of long plate-shaped main body plate portions 9481f1 extending vertically from the side surface of the main body plate portion 9481f1 in the thickness direction in a columnar shape. Mainly includes a fitting arm portion 9481f2.

Since the detachable front locking member 9481f is removable from the attachment portion 9481d, when the wiring W is replaced, such as when the wiring W is broken, the detachable front locking member 9481f is removed to lock the detachable front. It is possible to save the trouble of replacing the wiring W by avoiding the member 9481f and facilitating the replacement of the wiring W.

The plurality of fitting arm portions 9481f2 are portions for fixing the detachable front locking member 9481f to the attachment portion 9484d by sandwiching the attachment portion 9481d, and are arranged side by side at intervals slightly shorter than the plate thickness of the attachment portion 9481d. A pair of rod-shaped members are connected in two sets. When the detachable front locking member 9481f is fixed to the attachment portion 9481d, a pair of rod-shaped members of the plurality of fitting arm portions 9481f2 are elastically deformed by being pushed from the attachment portion 9481d, and the attachment portion is elastically restored by the elastic recovery force. 9481d is sandwiched.

The length of the fitting arm portion 9481f2 is formed to be slightly longer than the length in the width direction of the fitting portion 9481f, and the fitting portion 9481f is directed toward the mating arm portion 9481f2 on the other side holding the fitting portion 9481f at the tip of the fitting arm portion 9481f2. A protruding portion 9481f3 is formed. By catching the projecting portion 9481f3 on the attachment portion 9481f, it is possible to prevent the detachable front locking member 9481f from coming off from the attachment portion 9481f to the front side (front side in FIG. 62A).

In this case, the fitting arm portion 9481f2 is formed in a columnar shape, and the fitting recess 9481d1 is formed as a recess having a semicircular cross section. Therefore, when the fitting arm portion 9481f2 sandwiches the attachment portion 9484d with an elastic recovery force. , The axial center of the fitting arm portion 9481f2 is brought to the center of the fitting recess 9481d1. As a result, it is possible to facilitate the alignment when the detachable front locking member 9481f is attached to the attachment portion 9781d, and the time required for attachment can be shortened.

The non-slip plate portion 9481g is a portion that sandwiches the wiring W with the plate-shaped arm portion 481a, and is formed continuously over the width direction (vertical direction in FIG. 62B) of the attachment portion 9481d. It is elastically deformable in the thickness direction of the attachment portion 9481d and the plate-shaped arm portion 481a. The distance between the tip of the non-slip plate portion 9481g and the plate-shaped arm portion 481a is usually formed to be less than or equal to the thickness of the wiring W, and by inserting the wiring W there, the non-slip plate portion 9481g is formed. It is elastically deformed, and the elastic recovery force prevents the wiring W from slipping with respect to the plate-shaped arm portion 481a.

The orientation of the non-slip plate portion 9481g is arranged so as to be elastically deformable along the longitudinal direction of the attachment portion 9481d. As a result, the wiring W can be sandwiched between the non-slip plate portion 9481d and the plate-shaped arm portion 481a in the width direction, and the wiring W can be prevented from moving and rubbing in the longitudinal direction of the attachment portion 9481d. The durability of the wiring W can be improved.

The orientation of the pair of non-slip plate portions 9481g is opposite to each other at both ends of the attachment portion 9481d. As a result, it is possible to prevent the attachment portion 9481d and the wiring W from moving in the longitudinal direction of the attachment portion 9481d regardless of the movement direction of the wiring W. The non-slip plate portion 9481 g is arranged to face the rib portion N. As a result, the wiring W can be suppressed not at the tip portion of the non-slip plate portion 9481g but at the intermediate portion (belly), so that the resistance applied to the wiring W can be increased (see FIG. 64).

The other side auxiliary bottom portion 9481h is a plate-shaped portion formed having the same outer peripheral shape as the other side bottom portion 481e2, and the other side tubular portion 481c is formed in the circumferential direction of the other side tubular portion 481c from the back surface of the other side bottom portion 481e2. It is extended over about 120 degrees around the axis, and an inclined side surface 9481h1 is provided at the extending tip. As shown in FIG. 64A, the extended tip of the other side auxiliary bottom portion 9481h and the end portion of the one side bottom portion 482e1 of the second guide arm 9482 overlap in a front view. As a result, it is possible to prevent the wiring W from falling off to the back side (the back side of the paper surface in FIG. 64A).

The inclined side surface 9481h1 inclines toward the back side (lower side in FIG. 62B) as the distance from the other side bottom portion 481e2 increases.

63 (a) is a front view of the second guide arm 9482, FIG. 63 (b) is a bottom view of the second guide arm 9482, and FIG. 63 (c) is the LXIIIc of FIG. 63 (a). It is sectional drawing of the 2nd guide arm 9482 in -LXIIIc line.

As shown in FIG. 63 (a), the second guide arm 9482 includes an overhanging front locking portion 9482f extending from the front end portion of the attachment portion 482d in both directions in the thickness direction of the attachment portion 482d, and the attachment portion. Mainly includes a non-slip plate portion 9482 g extending from the end portion of the straight portion of the plate-shaped arm portion 482a and the plate-shaped arm portion 482a toward the plate-shaped arm portion 482a and the attachment portion 482d arranged to face each other.

The overhanging front locking portion 9482f is attached to an extended end portion extending to the opposite side of the plate-shaped arm portion 482a with the attachment portion 482d sandwiched therein, and the back side (FIG. 63) as the extension tip approaches the attachment portion 482. (C) Provided with an inclined side surface 9482f1 inclined to the right side).

Since the technical idea of the non-slip plate portion 9482 g is the same as the technical idea of the non-slip plate portion 9481 g described above, the description thereof is omitted here.

64 (a) and 64 (b) are front views of the first guide arm 9481 and the second guide arm 9482 of the wiring guide arm 9480, and FIG. 64 (c) is the LXIVc- of FIG. 64 (a). It is sectional drawing of the 1st guide arm 9481 and the 2nd guide arm 9482 of the wiring guide arm 9480 in the LXIVc line. In FIG. 64 (a), a state in which the first guide arm 9481 and the second guide arm 9482 are folded is shown, and in FIG. 64 (b), the first guide arm 9481 and the second guide arm 9482 are axially rotated and opened. The state of being struck is illustrated. Further, in FIGS. 64 (a) and 64 (b), the wiring W is shown, and in FIG. 64 (c), the wiring W is not shown.

Here, in order to secure the arrangement area of other movable accessories, it is desirable to suppress the arrangement area of the wiring guide arm 9480. Therefore, it is difficult to provide a margin in the area for accommodating the wiring W (for example, between the plate-shaped arm portion 481a and the attachment portion 9481d of the first guide arm 9481). In this case, the wiring W rubs against the inner surface of the wiring guide arm 9480 each time the state changes, such as when the wiring guide arm 9480 is folded or opened, the wiring W deteriorates early, and the durability of the wiring W deteriorates. It may decrease.

On the other hand, in the wiring guide arm 9480 of the present embodiment, the wiring W is sandwiched between the non-slip plate portions 9481 g, 9482 g and the plate-shaped arm portions 481a, 482a, so that the wiring W becomes the plate-shaped arm portion 481a. , 482a and relative movements with respect to the attachment portions 9481d and 482d are suppressed. As a result, the durability of the wiring W can be ensured.

Further, when the second guide arm 9482 is deformed with respect to the first guide arm 9481 in a twisted manner, the wiring W may also be twisted and the durability of the wiring W may be lowered.

On the other hand, in the wiring guide arm 9480 according to the present embodiment, in the state where the first guide arm 9481 and the second guide arm 9482 are opened (see FIG. 64B), the other side auxiliary bottom 9481h is the second guide arm. It overlaps with the one-side bottom 482e1 of 9482 in the front-rear direction. Here, the other side auxiliary bottom portion 9481h extends in the circumferential direction of the other side tubular portion 481c along the back surface of the other side bottom portion 481e2 (see FIG. 62B).

Therefore, in the state where the first guide arm 9481 and the second guide arm 9482 are opened (see FIG. 64 (b)), the other side auxiliary bottom portion 9481h and the one side bottom portion 482e1 are in a positional relationship that allows contact in the front-rear direction. It is formed. That is, when the second guide arm 9482 is twisted and deformed in the direction of pressing the one-side bottom portion 482e1 against the other-side auxiliary bottom portion 9484h with respect to the first guide arm 9484, the one-side bottom portion 482e1 and the other-side auxiliary bottom portion 9481h are brought into contact with each other. , The deformation resistance of torsional deformation increases. In this case, it is possible to prevent the first guide arm 9481 and the second guide arm 9482 from being twisted and deformed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress twisting and deformation of the wiring W, and it is possible to secure the durability of the wiring W.

In the present embodiment, in a state where the first guide arm 9481 and the second guide arm 9482 are folded (see FIG. 64 (a)), the overhanging front locking portion 9482f is in front of and behind the attached portion 9481d of the first guide arm 9481. They overlap in the direction and are formed in a positional relationship that allows contact in the front-rear direction (see FIG. 64 (c)). That is, when the second guide arm 9482 is twisted and deformed in the direction of pressing the overhanging front locking portion 9482f against the attachment portion 9481d with respect to the first guide arm 9484, the overhanging front locking portion 9482f and the attachment portion 9481d are hit. It is touched and the deformation resistance of torsional deformation increases. In this case, it is possible to prevent the first guide arm 9481 and the second guide arm 9482 from being twisted and deformed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress twisting and deformation of the wiring W, and it is possible to secure the durability of the wiring W.

Further, when the other side auxiliary bottom portion 9481h is further extended in the circumferential direction from the present embodiment, the first guide arm 9481 and the second guide arm 9482 are in a folded state (see FIG. 64A), and the second guide arm is second. The guide arm 9482 and the other side auxiliary bottom 9481h are brought into contact with each other, and the first guide arm 9484 and the overhanging front locking portion 9482f are brought into contact with each other.

In this case, since the back surface side of the second guide arm 9482 and the other side auxiliary bottom portion 9481h are in contact with each other, it is possible to prevent the front side of the second guide arm 9482 from falling down. On the other hand, since the front side of the first guide arm 9484 and the overhanging front locking portion 9482f are in contact with each other, it is possible to prevent the back side of the second guide arm 9482 from falling down. Therefore, when the first guide arm 9484 and the second guide arm 9482 are folded (see FIG. 64 (a)), the second guide arm 9482 twists with respect to the first guide arm 9484 regardless of the direction. Can be suppressed.

Further, the same effect can be obtained by adding the overhanging front locking portion 9482f to the back side of the second guide arm 9482. In this case, the pair of overhanging front locking portions 9482f is the first. Since the guide arm 9482 is sandwiched, it is necessary to improve the accuracy of positioning the first guide arm 9481 and the second guide arm 9482.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the portion that suppresses the twist of the second guide arm 9482 is formed so as to be displaced in the longitudinal direction of the second guide arm 9482, so that the first guide arm 9481 and the second guide arm 9482 are aligned. It is possible to reduce the degree required for the accuracy of.

In the present embodiment, the first guide arm 9481 and the second guide arm 9482 are folded (see FIG. 64 (a)), and the first guide arm 9481 and the second guide arm 9482 are opened (FIG. 64). Before reaching (b)), the extended tip of the other side auxiliary bottom portion 9481h may come into contact with the end surface of the one side bottom portion 482e1 of the second guide arm 9482.

On the other hand, by forming the inclined side surface 9481h1 (see FIG. 62 (a)) at the extending tip of the other side auxiliary bottom 9481h, the extending tip of the other side auxiliary bottom 9481h is in contact with the end face of the one side bottom 482e1. Even when they are in contact with each other, the other side auxiliary bottom portion 9481h can be mounted on the back side (the back side of the paper surface in FIG. 64 (b)) of the one side bottom portion 482e1. This makes it easy to form a state in which the first guide arm 9481 and the second guide arm 9482 are opened (see FIG. 64 (a)).

Further, from the state in which the first guide arm 9481 and the second guide arm 9482 are opened (see FIG. 64 (b)), the first guide arm 9484 and the second guide arm 9482 are folded (FIG. 64 (a)). (See), the extended tip of the overhanging front locking portion 9482f may come into contact with the side surface of the attachment portion 9481d.

On the other hand, by forming the inclined side surface 9482f1 (see FIG. 63 (c)) at the extending tip of the overhanging front locking portion 9482f, the extending tip of the overhanging front locking portion 9482f is attached to the attachment portion 9481d. Even when it comes into contact with the side surface, the overhanging front locking portion 9482f can be mounted on the front side (the front side of the paper surface in FIG. 64 (a)) of the attachment portion 9481d (see FIG. 64 (c)). This makes it easy to form the first guide arm 9481 and the second guide arm 9482 in a folded state (see FIG. 64A).

In the present embodiment, the case where the overhanging front locking portion 9482f that contacts the attachment portion 9481d is formed on the front side is described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the overhanging front locking portion 9482f may be formed as a pair of front side and back side. As a result, the overhanging front locking portion 9482f can be brought into contact with the attachment portion 9484d regardless of the direction of the twist deformation of the second guide arm 9482, and the first guide arm 9481 and the second guide arm 9482 are twisted and deformed. It can be suppressed.

Although the present invention has been described above based on the above-described embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and it is easy to make various modifications and improvements within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention. It can be inferred.

In each of the above embodiments, a part or all of the configurations in one embodiment may be combined with or replaced with a part or all of the configurations in another embodiment to form another embodiment.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the pair of decorative members 422 of the composite operation unit 400 swings to form a gap has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the decorative member 422 may be guided so as to be slidable in the left-right direction, and the pair of decorative members 422 may be slidably moved in the directions away from each other to form a gap for accommodating the swing member 430. In this case, the width of the gap formed between the pair of decorative members 422 can be secured in the vertical direction.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the moving upper lid member 332 of the board surface lower unit 300 slides in the front-rear direction has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a pair of long plate-shaped movable members that are pivotally supported on the inner surface of the pair of step portions 324a and are formed in pairs on the left and right are provided, and the movable members are in the direction in which the pair of step portions 324a are continuously provided. A closed state that is arranged along the longitudinal direction to prevent the ball from passing through the specific winning opening 65a, and an opening that allows the ball to pass through the specific winning opening 65a by swinging in the ascending or descending direction from that state. It may be possible to form a state. Further, with the same configuration, the second winning opening 640 may be configured instead of the specific winning opening 65a.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the light emitted from the light irradiation device 331c is reflected to the front side when the moving upper lid member 332 of the board surface lower unit 300 is in the retracted state has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. It's not a thing. For example, a portion that reflects the light emitted from the light irradiation device 331c toward the front side when the moving upper lid member 332 is in the overhanging state may be formed in the lower portion of the moving upper lid member 332. In this case, the light reflected by the moving upper lid member 332 is not blocked by the sphere, and the effect of producing the light can be improved.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the positioning portion 543 is united with the moving member 540 of the swinging operation unit 500 by uneven fitting has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, magnets may be arranged at positions where the pair of moving members 540 are arranged close to each other, and the moving members 540 may be united by magnetic force. In this case, the moving members 540 can be attracted to each other by magnetic force, and it is not necessary for the driving device 550 to generate a holding force when the moving members 540 are arranged at the overhanging position. Therefore, the power consumption of the drive device 550 can be suppressed.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the guide hole 413 of the composite operation unit 400 is formed in a straight line has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the guide hole 413 may be formed in a curved shape. In this case, even if the moving speed of the main body member 410 is the same, the swing speed of the shielding member 420 can be adjusted.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the main body member 431 of the swing member 430 of the composite operation unit 400 swings has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the swing member 430 may include a slide member that slides and moves in a direction away from the main body member 410, and a decorative member 422 may be accommodated between the slide member and the main body member 410.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the guide arms of the wiring guide arms 480 of the composite operation unit 400 are stacked in the vertical direction has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the guide arms of the wiring guide arm 480 may be stacked in the front-rear direction. In this case, since the vertical width of the wiring guide arm 480 can be narrowed, the width of the bottom wall portion 211 required to accommodate the wiring guide arm 480 can be narrowed outside the opening 211a. As a result, the arrangement area of the third symbol display device 81 can be expanded.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the moving member 540 is supported by a pair of arm members of the driving side arm members 520, 2520, 3520, 7520 and the driven side arm members 530, 7530 has been described, but the case is not necessarily limited to this. is not. For example, the moving member 540 may be supported by a plurality of arm members of three or more. In this case, for example, by fastening and fixing the bridge members 528, 2528, and 7528 to the intermediate arm members and arranging them so as to cover the front sides of the arm members at both ends, the effect of suppressing the misalignment between the arm members is suppressed. Can be improved. That is, when one of the arm members at both ends pushes one end of the bridge member 528, 2528, 7528 and the bridge member 528, 2528, 7528 bends, the other end is the other. It moves in a direction approaching the arm member and is supported by the other arm member. In this way, the arm members at both ends work to suppress the bending of the bridge members 528, 2528, 7528, and as a result, the misalignment of the plurality of arm members can be suppressed, and the posture of the moving member 540 is stabilized. Can be made to.

In the first to fifth embodiments and the seventh embodiment, each of the guide arms 481 to 483 of the wiring guide arm 480 has a cylindrical portion (for example, one side shaft support portion 482b) and a cylindrical portion (for example, one side shaft support portion 482b). For example, the case where the shaft is supported by the other side cylindrical portion 481c) has been described, but the case is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the portion supporting the columnar portion may be formed by elongated holes extending in the longitudinal direction of each of the guide arms 481 to 483. In this case, in addition to the vertical expansion and contraction in which the guide arms 481 to 483 are bent, the horizontal expansion and contraction in which the guide arms 481 to 483 slide and move in the extending direction of the elongated hole can be performed.

In the first to fifth embodiments and the seventh embodiment, the lower side surface (for example, the plate-shaped arm portion 481a) of each arm member (for example, the first guide arm 481) constituting the wiring guide arm 480 is used. Although the case where the width is shorter than that of the upper side surface (for example, the attachment portion 9481d) is described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the lower side surface (for example, the plate-shaped arm portion 481a) of each arm member (for example, the first guide arm 481) may be wider than the upper side surface (for example, the attachment portion 9481d). In this case, it is possible to prevent the wiring W from sliding down from the lower side surface (for example, the plate-shaped arm portion 481a) due to gravity.

From the first embodiment to the fifth embodiment, in the seventh embodiment and the ninth embodiment, the case where the width of the wiring W is shorter than the attachment portions 481d and 9484d has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. .. For example, the formation of the front locking portion 481f may be omitted, and the width of the wiring W may be longer than the width of the plate-shaped arm portions 481a and the attachment portions 481d and 9481d. In this case, since a part of the wiring W protrudes from the plate-shaped arm portion 481a and the attachment portions 481d and 9484d, the wiring W can be easily taken out by pinching (hooking with a finger) the protruding portion with a finger. As a result, maintenance of the wiring W can be easily performed.

From the first embodiment to the fifth embodiment, in the seventh embodiment and the ninth embodiment, the case where the widths of the attachment portions 481d and 9481d are constant has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a portion other than the portion where the front locking portion 481f of the attachment portions 481d and 9481d is fixed may be formed with the same width as the plate-shaped arm portion 481a. In this case, by making the width of the wiring W longer than the plate-shaped arm portion 481a, a part of the wiring W can be projected from the plate-shaped arm portion 481a and the attachment portions 481d and 9481d. Therefore, the wiring W can be easily taken out by pinching the protruding portion with a finger (hanging it with a finger). As a result, maintenance of the wiring W can be easily performed.

In the fourth embodiment, the case where the recessed portion 4424c is formed on the upper side surface of the guide hole 4424b has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the thickness of the upper side surface of the guide hole 4424b may be thicker than the thickness of the lower side surface. In this case, the friction generated between the upper side surface of the guide hole 4424b and the connecting member 423 can be made larger than the friction generated between the lower side surface of the guide hole 4424b and the connecting member 423, so that the main body member 410 is lowered. It is possible to suppress the rebound of the connecting member 423 that occurs when moving to.

In the fourth embodiment, the case where the recessed portion 4424c is formed on the upper side surface of the guide hole 4424b has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a recess capable of accommodating the slide shaft portion 423e may be formed on the upper side surface of the lower end portion of the guide hole 413 of the main body member 410. In this case, when the insertion shaft portion 421c is arranged at the lower end portion of the guide hole 413, the resistance F applied to the insertion shaft portion 421c from the side surface of the guide hole 413 can be increased.

In the eighth embodiment, the case where the direction changing portion 8013c is arranged only at the extended end portion of the light projecting passage 8013b has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the direction changing portion 8013c may be additionally arranged in the middle of the light projecting passage 8013b. In this case, the light reflected from the direction changing portion 8013c arranged in the middle of the projection passage 8013b to the front side and the light transmitted through the direction changing portion 8013c are arranged at the extended end portion of the projection passage 8013b. The light can be separated from the light reflected from the direction changing portion 8013c to the front side. That is, since the light emitted from the light irradiation device 8610 can be divided into a plurality of pieces, the number of lights visually recognized in front view can be increased with respect to the number of light irradiation devices 8610. As a result, the number of light irradiation devices 8610 arranged can be suppressed while maintaining the effect of the light irradiation device 8610.

The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from each of the above embodiments. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right item, a three-time right item) that raises the expected value of the jackpot until multiple times (for example, two or three times) a big hit state occurs. It may be carried out as). Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and is in a special gaming state on the condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various game machines such as a pachinko machine, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine.

It should be noted that, for example, in a slot machine, the symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where a coin is inserted and the symbol effective line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is "provided with a display device for displaying the identification information in a variable manner after displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever) is caused. The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed and displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. It becomes a "slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of identification information at the time is specific". In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Take as an example.

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for variably displaying a symbol sequence composed of a plurality of symbols and then confirming the symbol is provided, and a handle for launching a ball is provided. Some are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the symbol variation is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, and for example, due to the operation of the stop button or a predetermined amount. As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game is generated that gives the player a predetermined game value on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a predetermined game value. Is for paying out a large amount of balls to the lower saucer. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only a ball can be treated as a game value in the game hall, which is a game value seen in the current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the locations where game machines are installed can be solved.

The concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention are shown below.

<Example of technical concept in which a moving member is accommodated between a member that tilts forward and a base member>
A first moving member that is movable between a retracted position formed on the outside of the liquid crystal display device and an overhanging position formed on the front side of the liquid crystal display device, and a first moving member that is movable relative to the first moving member. The first moving member is provided with a second moving member which is formed in the above and arranged on the front side of the first moving member, and the first moving member forms an overlapping portion which overlaps with the second moving member in a front view. In a gaming machine in which the area of the overlapping portion is larger when the first moving member is arranged at the retracted position than when the first moving member is arranged at the overhanging position, the first moving member is frontal. The first moving member is provided with an auxiliary member which is arranged on the side and is formed so as to be movable in the direction of approaching and separating from the first moving member, and when the first moving member is arranged in a retracted position. A game machine A1 characterized in that the second moving member is accommodated between the auxiliary member and the auxiliary member.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a plurality of moving members are arranged in the front-rear direction, and at the retracted position, a large overlapping portion is formed so that the area visible in the front view of the plurality of moving members is reduced, while the tension is reduced. At the output position, there is a gaming machine in which a large production area is secured by forming the overlapping portion smaller than the retracted position (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-229580). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, in order to avoid interference between the moving member on the front side and the moving member on the back side, the overlapping portion is formed flat particularly at the retracted position of the moving member on the back side. Therefore, there is a problem that the effect of the moving member on the back side at the overhanging position is limited to a flat surface, and the effect of the effect is reduced.

Here, as a method for solving the problem that the effect is limited to a flat surface, for example, a method of three-dimensionally forming the moving member on the front side toward the front side can be considered. However, in this case, since the space on the front side of the moving member on the front side is limited, it is not possible to form a front-rear difference enough to form the moving member on the back side three-dimensionally.

Further, as a method of solving the limitation that the effect is limited to a flat surface, for example, a portion that does not overlap with the moving member on the front side is made on the moving member on the back side, and at that portion, the moving member on the back side is moved to the front. A method of disposing a member that moves in the direction of approaching and separating from each other can be considered. However, in this case, the portion of the moving member on the back side provided as a portion that does not overlap with the moving member on the front side is projected to the outside of the moving member on the front side when the moving member is placed in the retracted position. As a result, it becomes difficult to narrow the arrangement space when the moving member on the front side and the moving member on the back side are arranged in the retracted position, and it becomes impossible to secure the space for arranging the liquid crystal display device.

On the other hand, according to the game machine A1, the auxiliary member is arranged on the front side of the first moving member and is formed so as to be movable in the direction of approaching and separating from the first moving member, and the first moving member is arranged in the retracted position. In this state, the second moving member can be accommodated between the first moving member and the auxiliary member. Therefore, it is possible to avoid interference between the auxiliary member arranged on the first moving member and the second moving member, narrow the arrangement space of those members, and arrange the auxiliary member on the front side of the second moving member. Compared to the case of setting, it is possible to perform a three-dimensional effect by utilizing a large front and rear space.

Further, in the overhanging state in which the second moving member is not accommodated between the first moving member and the auxiliary member, the auxiliary member is arranged close to the first moving member so as to be between the first moving member and the auxiliary member. It is possible to suppress the dead space of the auxiliary member, and it is possible to easily arrange another member on the front side of the auxiliary member.

The mode of movement of the auxiliary member is not particularly limited, and it may be a mode in which the movement direction is formed by one axis such as a slide movement, a mode in which a rotation axis is defined and rotates around the rotation axis, or a combination thereof. good.

In the game machine A1, the first moving member includes a first supporting portion that supports the auxiliary member, and the first supporting portion is moved toward a retracted position by the first moving member, and the second moving member is moved. A member is supported between the first moving member and the auxiliary member on the opposite end of the end, and a driving force is applied to a point near the first support with the first support as a fulcrum. The gaming machine A2 is characterized in that the end portion of the auxiliary member on the second moving member side moves in the direction of approaching and separating from the first moving member by being acted on and swinging the auxiliary member.

According to the game machine A2, in addition to the effect of the game machine A1, the swinging motion of the auxiliary member with the first support portion as a fulcrum causes the end portion of the auxiliary member on the second moving member side to separate from the first moving member. As a result, a space for accommodating the second moving member is formed between the first moving member and the auxiliary member.

Here, the first support portion shakes the end portion on the opposite side of the end portion where the first moving member is moved toward the retracted position and the second moving member is accommodated between the first moving member and the auxiliary member. Support movably. Therefore, even if the amount of movement of the auxiliary member in the first support portion is small, the amount of movement of the end portion of the auxiliary member on the side accommodating the second moving member can be increased.

In this case, by applying a driving force to a point near the first support portion of the auxiliary member to swing the auxiliary member, the second moving member is compared with the driving distance of the point near the first support portion of the auxiliary member. The end of the auxiliary member on the side of accommodating the first moving member can be largely separated from the first moving member.

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the second moving member from coming into contact with the auxiliary member. That is, it is possible to achieve both suppression of the driving distance of the auxiliary member and prevention of contact between the second moving member and the auxiliary member.

In the game machine A2, the side surface of the second moving member on the side facing the auxiliary member is such that the end portion on the side closer to the first support portion is on the side away from the first support portion. A game machine A3 characterized in that it is arranged closer to the first moving member as compared with the end portion.

According to the game machine A3, in addition to the effect of the game machine A2, when the second moving member starts to be accommodated between the first moving member and the auxiliary member, the second moving member approaches the first support portion of the second moving member. It begins to be accommodated from the side end, that is, the side end that is placed close to the first moving member. Therefore, it is possible to secure a space between the second moving member and the auxiliary member when the second moving member starts to be accommodated between the first moving member and the auxiliary member. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the second moving member from colliding with the first moving member or the auxiliary member.

In the game machines A2 and A3, the second moving member is formed of a pair of members movably supported by a second supporting portion formed at an end portion on the side away from the auxiliary member, and the pair of members thereof. (2) Each of the moving members is formed so as to be movable in a direction away from the auxiliary member, and at least a part of the auxiliary member can be accommodated between the pair of the second moving members by the moving operation. A4 game machine characterized by.

Here, for example, when the mechanism portion for swinging the auxiliary member is arranged on the front side of the first moving member, the area of the overlapping portion between the first moving member and the second moving member is increased (first). In order to bring the first moving member and the second moving member closer to each other in the moving direction of the moving member), it is conceivable to arrange the second moving member on the front side of the mechanical portion. On the other hand, in this case, since it is necessary to move the auxiliary member accommodating the second moving member to the front side (direction away from the first moving member), the space on the front side of the auxiliary member is suppressed, and the auxiliary member is moved. It becomes difficult to form three-dimensionally on the front side.

On the other hand, according to the game machine A4, in addition to the effects of the game machines A2 and A3, at least a part of the auxiliary member is accommodated in the space created by the pair of second moving members being separated from each other. Can be done. As a result, for example, it is not necessary to move the second moving member to the front side of the mechanical portion of the auxiliary member in order to increase the area of the overlapping portion between the first moving member and the second moving member. It can be arranged close to the first moving member. As a result, the auxiliary member can be three-dimensionally formed on the front side.

In any of the game machines A2 to A4, the game machine A5 is characterized in that the first support portion is arranged on the side of the auxiliary member close to the liquid crystal display device.

According to the game machine A5, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines A2 to A4, the first support portion is arranged on the side of the auxiliary member close to the liquid crystal display device. In this case, the first moving member is arranged at the retracted position and the auxiliary member is swung in the direction away from the first moving member, so that the display surface formed on the auxiliary member is inside the liquid crystal display device (game). It is directed to the person side). As a result, when the first moving member is moved to the retracted position, the display surface of the auxiliary member can be directed toward the player, and the effect of the auxiliary member can be improved. Therefore, the purpose of the first support portion is to increase the distance between the ends of the first moving member and the end portion of the auxiliary member on the side where the second moving member is to be accommodated, and to direct the display surface of the auxiliary member toward the player. Can also be used.

<Example of technical concept to suppress the bounce of moving members>
A first moving member that is movably formed, a base member that the first moving member is formed to be relatively movable, and a second moving member whose one end is guidedly connected to the first moving member. And a connecting member whose one end is supported by the other end of the second moving member and whose other end is guidedly connected to the base member, and a driving force for moving the first moving member. A drive device for generating is provided, and the second moving member and the connecting member are moved by the movement of the first moving member, and one end of the second moving member or the other end of the connecting member is provided. When either one reaches the end position in the guided range, one end of the second moving member or the other end of the other end of the connecting member is the other end of the second moving member. A gaming machine B1 characterized in that the connection member is guided in a direction including a vertical component in a moving direction of a support point at one end of the connecting member.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a first moving member, a second moving member connected to the first moving member so as to guide one end thereof, and one to the other end of the second moving member. A connecting member whose end is supported and whose other end is guidedly connected to the base member and a driving device for driving the first moving member are provided, and the second moving member and the connecting member are connected by the movement of the first moving member. There is a gaming machine in which a member is moved and arranged at different timings at end positions in a range in which one end of the second moving member and the other end of the connecting member are guided (for example, JP-A-2008-). See Japanese Patent Publication No. 1943113). However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, when the first moving member is moved, the end of the movable range is reached first in one end of the second moving member or the other end of the connecting member. When the end reaches the end position of the movable range, the support point of the other end of the second moving member and one end of the connecting member bounces in the direction opposite to the moving direction up to that point. In this case, there is a problem that the arrangement of the second moving member and the connecting member becomes unstable.

On the other hand, according to the game machine B1, when either one end of the second moving member or the other end of the connecting member reaches the end position in the guided range, the second moving member One end or the other of the other end of the connecting member is guided in a direction that includes a vertical component of the moving direction of the other end of the second moving member and the support point of one end of the connecting member. To. As a result, the direction in which the support points of the other end of the second moving member and one end of the connecting member bounce off and the guiding direction of one end of the second moving member or the other end of the connecting member It intersects and creates resistance in the second moving member or connecting member. This resistance prevents the support points of the other end of the second moving member and one end of the connecting member from bouncing back. Therefore, the arrangement of the second moving member can be stabilized.

The connecting member and the second moving member may be fixed at a point where they are supported by each other. That is, the connecting member and the second moving member may be configured to be handleable as one.

In the game machine B1, the base member includes a guide path for guiding the other end of the connecting member, and the guide path is such that the other end of the connecting member is at least one of the guide paths of the base member. Braking that suppresses the movement of the other end of the connecting member along the guide path on the side surface on the side that receives the other end of the connecting member when the end position of the connecting member is reached and the support point bounces off. A game machine B2 characterized by having a part.

According to the game machine B2, in addition to the effect of the game machine B1, the base member includes a guide path for guiding the other end of the connecting member. The guide path connects to the side surface of the connecting member on the side that receives the other end of the connecting member when the other end of the connecting member reaches at least one end position in the guiding direction of the base member and the support point bounces off. A braking portion that suppresses movement of the other end of the member along the guide path is provided.

Therefore, the other end of the connecting member guides the base member while suppressing the resistance of movement of the connecting member in the guiding direction until the other end of the connecting member reaches the end position in the guiding direction of the base member. After reaching the end position in the direction, the effect of braking the other end of the connecting member can be produced.

The braking portion formed on the side surface of the guide path includes a recessed portion capable of partially accommodating the other end portion of the connecting member, a high friction portion having increased frictional resistance by embossing, and a spring member. An example is a spring portion or the like to which an elastic force is applied.

In the game machine B1 or B2, the second moving member is formed of a pair of members arranged in parallel in a direction perpendicular to the moving direction of the support point, and one end of the second moving member is guided. The gaming machine B3 is characterized in that the directions of the directional components perpendicular to the moving direction of the support point in the direction are opposite to each other between the pair of second moving members.

According to the game machine B3, in addition to the effect of the game machine B1 or B2, a pair of directions of the directional components perpendicular to the moving direction of the support point in the guiding direction of one end of the second moving member are paired. The second moving members of the above are formed in opposite directions to each other. Therefore, as one end of the pair of second moving members is guided by the first moving member and moves, the other end of the second moving member is loaded along the direction perpendicular to the moving direction of the support point. Power is offset. As a result, it is possible to prevent the other end of the second moving member from being displaced in the direction perpendicular to the moving direction of the support point during the movement of the first moving member. Therefore, the second moving member can be stabilized.

In any of the game machines B1 to B3, the base member comprises a pair of guide paths that guide the other end of the connecting member, and the connecting member is guided by the separate guide paths at the other end. The pair of connecting members are formed of a pair of members, and when the other end reaches the end position of the guide path, the other end of the connecting member is along the guide path. The gaming machine B4 is characterized in that the directional components perpendicular to the moving direction of the support point in the bounceable direction are opposite to each other.

According to the game machine B4, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines B1 to B3, when the other end of the pair of connecting members reaches the end position of the guide path of the base member, the other of the connecting members The directional components perpendicular to the moving direction of the support point in the direction in which the end of the can bounce along the guide path are opposite to each other.

In this case, the other end of the pair of connecting members reaches the end position of the guide path of the base member, and the support point of the pair of connecting members with the second moving member is in a direction perpendicular to the moving direction up to that point. When it is about to move (displace), one of the pair of connecting members is pressed against the end of the guide path of the base member, and the moving resistance of the pair of connecting members increases. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the support points between the second moving member and the pair of connecting members from being moved (positionally displaced) in a direction perpendicular to the previous moving direction. Thereby, the arrangement of the second moving member can be stabilized.

In the game machine B4, in the pair of connecting members, an intermediate portion formed between the one end portion and the other end portion forms the one end portion and the other end portion of the connecting member. The gaming machine B5 is characterized in that it is arranged on the side away from the second moving member as compared with the straight line to be connected.

Here, for example, when the connecting member is formed of a linear plate-shaped member, one of the connecting members is arranged at the terminal position on the side that projects toward the inside of the liquid crystal display device. When the end portion of the is moved, the distance between the connecting member and the second moving member is narrowed, and the connecting member and the second moving member may come into contact with each other.

On the other hand, according to the game machine B5, in addition to the effect of the game machine B4, the intermediate portion of the connecting member is second compared to the straight line connecting one end and the other end of the pair of connecting members. It is arranged on the side away from the moving member.

Therefore, when the pair of connecting members are arranged at the end positions of the movable range on the side protruding toward the inside of the liquid crystal display device, even if one end of the connecting members is moved, the connecting member and the second A sufficient distance from the moving member can be secured, and the connecting member can be prevented from coming into contact with the second moving member. Therefore, the degree of freedom in designing the second moving member can be improved.

In any of the game machines B1 to B5, the second moving member is formed of a pair of members, and one end of the second moving member is arranged at at least one end position in the guiding direction. As a result, the gaming machine B6 is characterized in that the pair of second moving members are brought into contact with each other.

According to the game machine B6, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines B1 to B5, one end of the pair of second moving members is arranged at at least one end position in the guide direction, whereby the pair The second moving member of is abutted. Therefore, the misalignment of one of the second moving members among the pair of second moving members can be corrected by abutting with the other second moving member. That is, since a relationship is formed in which the pair of second moving members correct each other's misalignment, the arrangement of the second moving members can be stabilized.

<Example of technical concept in which wiring is arranged along movable members>
In a gaming machine including a movable member formed movably and wiring connected to the movable member, one end is connected to the moving member and the other end is outside the liquid crystal display device. The gaming machine C1 is provided with a wiring auxiliary member that is connected to a rear case and is formed to be expandable and contractible, and the wiring is arranged along the wiring auxiliary member.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines in which electrical wiring is arranged without support from the back case to the moving member (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-245160). However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, the wiring takes an unexpected arrangement when the moving member moves, and for example, the wiring rubs against other members or the wiring is pinched by other members, resulting in durability. There was a problem that there was a risk of losing sex.

On the other hand, according to the game machine C1, the wiring is arranged along the wiring auxiliary member connecting the rear case and the moving member, so that the arrangement of the wiring can be predicted and the wiring is different from other members. It is possible to prevent the wiring from being rubbed or being pinched by other members. As a result, the durability of the wiring can be improved.

Examples of the expansion and contraction modes include a folding type expansion and contraction, a slide type expansion and contraction, and a bellows expansion and contraction.

Further, as the wiring, a round wire-shaped wiring, a flat harness, and the like are exemplified. The flat harness has an advantage that it is easy to set so as to bend around a certain axis as compared with a round wire.

In the game machine C1, the wiring auxiliary member includes a plurality of arm members, and the arm members are a long rod-shaped connecting rod portion and a short side of the connecting rod portion at at least one end of the connecting rod portion. A gaming machine including a support portion formed in a columnar or tubular shape having a shaft in a direction and rotatably supporting the arm members, and the wiring is arranged in a manner of wrapping around the support portion. C2.

According to the game machine C2, in addition to the effect of the game machine C1, the wiring auxiliary member is formed of a plurality of arm members rotatably supported by the support portion formed at the end portion, and the wiring is formed by the support portion. Since the wiring is arranged so as to wrap around, it is possible to prevent the wiring from being bent at an acute angle due to the rotation of the arm members.

In the game machine C2, the connecting rod portion includes a pair of side wall portions arranged side by side along a long direction, and the pair of side wall portions are arranged vertically and formed below the pair of side wall portions. The width of the side wall portion to be formed is made longer than the width of the side wall portion formed upward, and the width of at least one side wall portion is shorter than the width dimension of the wiring. ..

According to the game machine C3, in addition to the effect of the game machine C2, it is possible to easily attach / detach the wiring at the time of manufacturing or repairing the game machine.

Here, in order to facilitate the attachment / detachment of the wiring from the arm member, it is effective to set the width of the pair of side wall portions of the arm member to be equal to or less than the width dimension of the wiring member so that the wiring member protrudes from the arm member. .. However, if the width of the side wall is too short, the wiring may fall off from the arm member.

On the other hand, according to the game machine C3, at least one side wall portion is shorter than the width dimension of the wiring, and the width of the side wall portion formed below is longer than the width of the side wall portion formed above. It is formed. As a result, the area of the side wall portion of the arm member that supports the wiring pressed downward by gravity is secured, and the wiring can be easily attached to and detached from the arm member while preventing the wiring from falling off from the arm member. ..

In the game machine C3, the plurality of arm members include a bottom portion connecting one end portion of the pair of side wall portions in the lateral direction, and the wiring is a concave cross-sectional portion formed by the bottom portion and the side wall portion. The support portion is provided with a lid member disposed at the tip opposite to the bottom portion, and the lid member is arranged from at least the support portion so as to face the support portion and connects the wiring to the support portion. The gaming machine C4 is characterized in that it is extended to a position where it overlaps with the wiring toward the side wall portion sandwiched between the two.

According to the game machine C4, the arm member forms a concave cross section with a pair of side wall portions and the bottom portion, wiring is accommodated in the concave cross section portion, and a lid member is arranged at the tip portion on the opposite side to the bottom portion of the support portion. Will be done. The lid member extends from at least the support portion toward a side wall portion which is arranged to face the support portion and sandwiches the wiring with the support portion to a position where the lid member overlaps the wiring. As a result, even if the wiring is about to fall off from the pair of side wall portions, the lid member is caught in the wiring.

Therefore, according to the game machine C4, in addition to the effect of the game machine C3, the wiring is bent in the axial direction of the rotation shaft due to the rotation of the arm members, and the wiring is easily displaced in the support portion. The lid member can prevent the wiring from falling off from the arm member.

Further, by arranging the lid member on the support portion where the pair of arm members are supported by each other, the number of the lid members arranged can be suppressed. That is, when the lid member is formed in the middle of the arm members, it is necessary to form the lid member for each of the pair of arm members, and the number of the lid members arranged is required for the number of the arm members. On the other hand, by disposing the lid member on the support portion, the number of the lid members arranged can be obtained by subtracting one from the number of the plurality of arm members to be connected.

In the game machine C4, the length of the arm members arranged adjacent to each other in the long direction is formed differently from the length of the lid member formed along the long direction of the arm members. A game machine C5 characterized by this.

According to the game machine C5, in addition to the effect of the game machine C4, the length of the arm members arranged adjacent to each other is different from the length of the lid member formed along the elongated direction of the arm members. Therefore, the arrangement of the lid members fixed to the support portions of the arm members arranged adjacent to each other can be shifted in the elongated direction of the arm members. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the lid members from interfering with each other when the adjacent arm members are arranged close to each other. In this case, it is possible to achieve both the arrangement of the arm member in a space-saving manner and the prevention of the wiring from falling off by enlarging the lid member.

In any of the game machines C2 to C5, the arm member extends from the connecting rod side along the elongated direction of the bottom portion to the shaft bottom portion extending beyond the support portion, and around the support portion. A wall portion formed in a wall shape is provided, and the arm members are rotatably supported by each other in the support portion, and the shaft bottom portion is in a rotation direction in which the arm members that are axially supported by each other are separated from each other. When arranged at the end position, the arm members are formed so as to be abuttable in the rotation direction, and the wall portion is arranged at the end position in the rotation direction in which the arm members axially supported by each other are separated from each other. The gaming machine C6 is characterized in that a gap is formed in the rotation direction of the arm member.

According to the game machine C6, the arm members are rotatably supported by each other in the support portion, and the shaft bottom portion in which the arm members extend from the connecting rod portion side along the elongated direction of the bottom portion exceeds the support portion. Is formed. Therefore, the arm members that are pivotally supported by each other are brought into contact with the shaft bottom portion of the support portion at the end position in the rotation direction that separates from each other, so that the arm members are rotated beyond the state in which they are arranged in a straight line. Is prevented.

As a result, according to the game machine C6, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines C2 to C5, the rotation angle of the arm member is defined, and the wiring is restricted from bending in the opposite direction. Can be prevented.

At the end position in the rotation direction where the arm members are separated from each other, a gap is formed in the wall portion in the rotation direction, so that even if the wiring bends and approaches the wall portion, the wiring is sandwiched between the wall portions. It is possible to prevent disconnection.

In any of the game machines C2 to C6, the rotational friction generated in the support portion near the reduced state of the wiring auxiliary member is suppressed as compared with the rotational friction generated in the support portion near the extended state of the auxiliary member. A game machine C7 characterized by this.

According to the game machine C7, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines C2 to C6, the rotational friction generated in the support portion near the reduced state of the wiring auxiliary member causes the rotation generated in the support portion near the extended state of the wiring auxiliary member. Since it is suppressed as compared with friction, it is possible to suppress the resistance generated in the support portion when the moving member moves in a manner of deforming the wiring auxiliary member from the reduced state to the extended state, and the movement of the moving member can be suppressed. The driving force required for the above can be suppressed.

Further, when the moving member moves at high speed, when the wiring auxiliary member approaches the extended state, the rotational friction at the support portion increases, so that the deformation speed of the wiring auxiliary member can be slowed down. As a result, it is possible to prevent the wiring auxiliary member from reaching the stretched state while the deformation speed of the wiring auxiliary member is high, and the pair of arm members from bending to the opposite side with force.

As a method of changing the rotational friction in the support portion depending on the state of the wiring auxiliary member, a recess or a hole for suppressing contact with each other is partially provided on the pillar of the support portion and the sliding surface of the cylinder, and the pillar. An example is a method of changing the area where the dents and holes formed in the cylinder overlap on the sliding surface depending on the state of the wiring auxiliary member. In this case, the smaller the area where the dents and holes formed in the pillar and the cylinder of the support portion overlap on the sliding surface, the more the rotational friction can be suppressed (the more the dents and holes overlap, the more the contact area between the pillar and the cylinder is. Increases, and rotational friction increases).

Here, for example, when a depression is formed in each of the cylinder and the pillar by half a circumference, if the depression of the cylinder and the depression of the pillar completely overlap each other, rotational friction occurs between the cylinder and the pillar in the remaining half circumference. On the other hand, if the recess of the cylinder and the recess of the pillar do not overlap, the recess is formed over the entire circumference of the sliding surface, so that the rotational friction is suppressed over the entire circumference. Further, when the recess of the cylinder and the recess of the pillar partially overlap, rotational friction occurs between the cylinder and the pillar in a region narrower than half the circumference. In this way, by changing the formation range of the depression on the sliding surface, the rotational friction between the cylinder and the pillar can be changed.

Further, a method of partially forming a satin ground by spraying powder on the sliding surface instead of the dents and holes is exemplified. Since a plurality of powders are dispersed and arranged on the surface of the satin ground to form an uneven surface, the larger the area of the satin ground on the sliding surface, the higher the rotational friction can be. The smaller the overlapping area of the satin ground formed on the pillar and the cylinder, the larger the total area of the satin ground effective against the rotational friction on the sliding surface, so that the rotational friction between the pillar and the cylinder can be increased.

Further, a method of attaching a tape having a low friction coefficient instead of a dent or a hole is exemplified. On the sliding surface, the smaller the area where the tape attached to the pillar and the cylinder of the support overlaps, the larger the total area effective for the rotational friction of the tape attached to the sliding surface, so that the rotational friction between the pillar and the cylinder increases. Can be suppressed.

In the game machine C7, the support portion formed in a columnar shape includes a first non-contact portion in which the formation of the outer peripheral side surface is partially omitted, and the support portion formed in a tubular shape forms an inner peripheral side surface. Is provided with a second non-contact portion in which the first non-contact portion is partially omitted, and the first non-contact portion and the second non-contact portion are arranged so as to partially overlap in the radial direction in a state where the arm members are supported by each other. The gaming machine C8 is characterized in that the overlapping area thereof is smaller when the wiring auxiliary member forms the extended state than when the wiring auxiliary member forms the reduced state.

Here, in order to change the rotational friction at the support portion depending on the state of the wiring auxiliary member, for example, when the support portion is textured, the surface shape is smoothed by the friction caused by the rotation of the support portion (flat surface). There is a risk that it will become), and there is a problem with durability. Further, for example, when a tape having low friction is attached, the tape may be peeled off due to the rotation of the support portion, which causes a problem in durability.

On the other hand, according to the game machine C8, in addition to the effect of the game machine C7, the support portion formed in a columnar shape is provided with a first non-contact portion in which the formation of the outer peripheral side surface is partially omitted, and has a tubular shape. The supported portion to be formed includes a second non-contact portion in which the formation of the inner peripheral side surface is partially omitted, and the first non-contact portion and the second non-contact portion do not contact each other. The area where the first non-contact portion and the second non-contact portion overlap in the radial direction is smaller when the wiring auxiliary member forms the extended state than when the wiring auxiliary member forms the reduced state.

Therefore, according to the game machine C8, in addition to the effect of the game machine C7, the rotational friction generated in the support portion near the reduced state of the wiring auxiliary member is compared with the rotational friction generated in the support portion near the extended state of the wiring auxiliary member. Can be suppressed.

Since the first non-contact portion and the second non-contact portion can be easily manufactured having the same shape by manufacturing a mold, the rotational friction of the support portion can be changed depending on the state of the wiring auxiliary member. It can be easily achieved.

Examples of the first non-contact portion and the second non-contact portion include a recess formed in the sliding surface of the support portion, a hole formed in the sliding surface of the support portion, and the like.

The game machines C2 to C8 are provided with a front locking member that is detachably fixed to the connecting rod portion, and the connecting rod portion is formed from a pair of side wall portions arranged side by side in the longitudinal direction, and the front surface thereof. The gaming machine C9 is characterized in that the locking member is detachably fixed to one side wall portion in the lateral direction and is formed so as to project toward the other side wall portion.

According to the game machine C9, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines C2 to C8, the connecting rod portion is formed from a pair of side wall portions arranged side by side in the longitudinal direction, and one of the pair of side wall portions is formed. A front locking member is provided which is detachably fixed to the lateral end portion of the side wall portion of the wall surface and is formed so as to project toward the other side wall portion together with the flow.

Therefore, according to the game machine C9, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines C2 to C8, the wiring is prevented from falling off from the connecting rod portion when the front locking portion is attached, and the wiring is connected to the connecting rod portion when the front locking portion is attached. It can be easily pulled out from.

As a result, when the moving member operates, a front locking portion is attached to prevent the wiring from falling off, and when the moving member is stopped (for example, during maintenance), the front locking portion is removed to facilitate wiring replacement. be able to.

In the game machine C9, the front locking member includes at least a pair of arms, and when the front locking member is fixed to the one side wall, the one side wall is paired. The gaming machine C10 is sandwiched between the arms and the one side wall is provided with a fitting recess formed as a recess into which the arm can be fitted.

According to the game machine C10, in addition to the effect of the game machine C9, one side wall portion is sandwiched between the arm portion of the front locking member, and at that time, the arm portion is fitted into the fitting recess to lock the front surface. It is possible to prevent the member from sliding in the longitudinal direction of one side wall portion. This makes it possible to prevent the front locking member from being displaced with respect to the side wall portion.

As a method of preventing the front locking member from coming off the side wall portion, the arm portion of the front locking member is extended beyond the length in the width direction of the side wall portion, and is arranged to face each other at the extended end portion. An example is a method in which a projecting portion is provided so as to project toward the arm portion, and the projecting portion is hooked on the side wall portion to prevent it from coming off. In addition, a hook-shaped retaining portion that presses the front locking member from the side wall in the opposite direction to the pulling direction is formed, and the retaining portion is hooked on the front locking member to prevent the front locking member from coming off. Illustrated.

In the game machine C10, the pair of arms are formed in a cylindrical shape, and the fitting recess is formed as a recess extending in a semicircular cross section.

According to the game machine C11, in addition to the effect of the game machine C10, the arm portion is formed in a columnar shape and the fitting recess is formed in a semicircular cross section, so that one side wall portion is sandwiched between the pair of arm portions. When the arm is fitted into the fitting recess, the center of the arm is moved to the center of the fitting recess, so that the alignment when the front locking member is mounted on one side wall can be facilitated. , The time required for mounting can be shortened.

In any of the game machines C2 to C11, the game machine C12 is characterized in that the wiring auxiliary member includes a position shift suppressing portion for suppressing a position shift of the wiring along the longitudinal direction of the wiring auxiliary member.

According to the game machine C12, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines C2 to C11, the wiring auxiliary member includes a position shift suppressing portion that suppresses the position shift of the wiring auxiliary member along the longitudinal direction. It is possible to prevent the wiring from rubbing against the wiring auxiliary member and being worn.

As the misalignment suppressing portion, for example, when the connecting rod portion of the wiring auxiliary member sandwiches the wiring between the pair of wall portions, a recess formed on the side surface which is arranged to face the wiring is exemplified. In this case, for example, the pair of connecting rods are rotated in the direction of opening each other at the support portion, the distance between the ends of the pair of connecting rod portions on the support portion side (the distance around the support portion in the circumferential direction) is reduced, and the support portion Since the length of the wiring that goes around the wiring is excessive, it is possible to prevent the wiring from being displaced in the longitudinal direction of the wiring auxiliary member. That is, the remainder of the length of the wiring that goes around the support portion can be accommodated in the recess formed on the side surface that faces the wiring, and by absorbing the remainder, the wiring is displaced in the longitudinal direction of the wiring auxiliary member. Can be suppressed.

Further, as the misalignment suppressing portion, for example, when the connecting rod portion of the wiring auxiliary member sandwiches the wiring between the pair of wall portions, the gap formed by the facing side surfaces of the pair of wall portions and the wiring is sandwiched is curved. An example is a portion formed in a bent shape. For example, there are cases where the gap in which the wiring is sandwiched is formed in an S shape, in a rectangular wavy shape, or in a dogleg shape.

In this case, when the wiring moves in the longitudinal direction of the pair of wall portions, the inner surface of the pair of wall portions and the wiring are separated from each other as compared with the case where the gap formed by the pair of wall portions is formed by a straight line. Since the number of contact points can be increased, the resistance applied to the wiring can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the wiring from moving in the longitudinal direction of the pair of wall portions.

Further, as the misalignment suppressing portion, for example, when the connecting rod portion of the wiring auxiliary member sandwiches the wiring between the pair of wall portions, the distance between the pair of wall portions is as narrow as the thickness of the wiring in the vicinity of the support portion. The part to be used is illustrated. In this case, for example, when the wiring auxiliary member is rotated by the support portion, even if the wiring moves in the radial direction of the support portion, the distance between the pair of wall portions is as narrow as the thickness of the wiring in the vicinity of the support portion. Therefore, the wiring can be narrowed by a pair of wall portions in the vicinity of the support portion. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the wiring from being displaced at the intermediate portion of the wiring auxiliary member.

Further, as the misalignment suppressing portion, for example, when the connecting rod portion of the wiring auxiliary member sandwiches the wiring between the pair of wall portions, a portion protruding from the inner side surface of one of the wall portions is exemplified. In this case, by hooking the overhanging portion on the wiring, the resistance between the wiring and the connecting rod portion can be increased, and the wiring can be prevented from being displaced in the longitudinal direction of the wiring auxiliary member.

In the game machine C12, the connecting rod portion is formed from a pair of side wall portions juxtaposed along the longitudinal direction, and the misalignment suppressing portion projects from the one side wall portion toward the other side wall portion. A game machine C13 characterized in that it is formed.

According to the game machine C13, in addition to the effect of the game machine C12, the connecting rod portion is formed from a pair of side wall portions arranged side by side in the longitudinal direction, and the misalignment suppressing portion is formed from one side wall portion to the other. Since the wiring is formed so as to project toward the side wall portion, it is possible to form a portion where the wiring is caught on the inner side surfaces of the pair of side wall portions, and it is possible to prevent the wiring from being displaced in the longitudinal direction of the connecting rod portion.

The game machine C13 is characterized in that the misalignment suppressing portions are continuously provided along the longitudinal direction of the side wall portions and are alternately formed on the pair of the side wall portions.

According to the game machine C14, in addition to the effect of the game machine C13, the misalignment suppressing portions are continuously provided along the longitudinal direction of the side wall portions and are alternately formed on the pair of side wall portions, so that only one side wall portion is formed. It is possible to make it easier for the wiring to be hooked on the misalignment suppressing portion as compared with the case where the misalignment suppressing portion is formed.

In the game machine C13 or C14, the distance between the misalignment suppressing portion and the other side wall portion is formed to be smaller than the thickness of the wiring, and the misalignment suppressing portion is elastically deformed in a direction away from the other side wall portion. A game machine C15 characterized in that it is possible.

According to the game machine C15, in addition to the effect of the game machine C13 or C14, the distance between the misalignment suppressing portion and the other side wall portion is formed to be smaller than the thickness of the wiring, and the misalignment suppressing portion is separated from the other side wall portion. Since it is elastically deformable in the direction in which the wiring is inserted, when the wiring is inserted between the misalignment suppressing portion and the other side wall portion, the misalignment suppressing portion is elastically deformed, and the elastic recovery force makes the wiring with the side wall portion. It can be sandwiched between the misalignment suppressing portion. As a result, it is possible to prevent the wiring from moving in the longitudinal direction of the connecting rod portion and rubbing against it, so that the durability of the wiring can be improved.

In any of the game machines C12 to C15, the connecting rod portion includes a pair of side wall portions arranged side by side along the elongated direction, and the misalignment suppressing portion is provided near the support portion of the pair of side wall portions. The gaming machine C16, characterized in that

According to the game machine C16, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines C2 to C15, the connecting rod portion is provided with a pair of side wall portions arranged side by side along the long direction, and the support portion of the pair of side wall portions is provided. A misalignment suppressing portion is formed in the vicinity.

In this case, the wiring arranged around the support portion is suppressed from being displaced in the vicinity of the support portion, which is particularly likely to be displaced when the pair of connecting rod portions are rotated, so that the wiring is oriented in the longitudinal direction of the wiring auxiliary member. It is possible to suppress the displacement along the line.

The misalignment suppressing portion may be formed by widening the forming interval of the pair of side wall portions in the vicinity of the supporting portion. The wiring can be curved at a portion where the forming interval of the pair of side wall portions is widened. Therefore, even if the wiring slackens near the support portion when the pair of connecting rod portions rotate, and the wiring is likely to be displaced in the longitudinal direction of the connecting rod portion, the wiring is curved at the misalignment suppressing portion. As a result, the amount of slack in the wiring near the support portion can be absorbed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the wiring from being displaced in the longitudinal direction of the pair of side wall portions, and it is possible to suppress wear of the wiring, so that the durability of the wiring can be improved.

In any of the game machines C2 to C16, of the pair of arm members supported by each other, the one arm member is extended toward the other arm member and in the axial view of the support portion. The gaming machine C17 is provided with an extension portion that overlaps with the other arm member, and the extension portion is formed so as to be abuttable with the other arm member in the axial direction of the support portion.

According to the game machine C17, the extension portion extending from one arm member toward the other arm member overlaps with the other arm member in the axial view of the support portion, and the other in the axial direction of the support portion. It is formed so that it can come into contact with the arm member.

In this case, when one arm member is twisted in a direction that brings the extension portion closer to the other arm member, the extension portion and the other arm member come into contact with each other, and the deformation resistance of the one arm member increases.

Therefore, according to the game machine C17, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines C2 to C16, one arm member is deformed in a manner of twisting in a direction in which the extension portion is brought closer to the other arm member. It can be suppressed, and accordingly, the wiring arranged along the arm member can be suppressed from being twisted and deformed. As a result, the durability of the wiring can be ensured.

<Example of technical concept to prevent misalignment of a pair of arms of a member that rotates with a parallel link>
The base plate, a pair of arm members whose one end is swingably supported by the base plate, and the other end of the pair of arm members are parallel to the axial support direction of the one end. A moving member that is swingably supported by a shaft and is movably formed between a first position and a second position that is different from the first position, and a driving force of the moving member. In a gaming machine comprising a drive device for generating a pair of arm members and the pair of arm members forming a parallel link, one arm member of the pair of arm members is arranged on a side surface in the swing axis direction. The gaming machine D1 is provided with a bridging member, and the bridging member is formed so as to be able to come into contact with a side surface of the other arm member in the pair of arm members in the swing axis direction.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine including a moving member that is movably formed by being swung by a parallel link (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-210238). However, the above-mentioned conventional game machine has a problem that the pair of arm members forming the parallel link may be displaced in the swing axis direction during the rotation of the moving member.

On the other hand, according to the game machine D1, the bridge member fixed to the side surface of one arm member in the swing axis direction is formed so as to be able to contact the side surface of the other arm member in the swing axis direction. .. In this case, since the movement of the other arm member in the swing axis direction can be prevented by the bridge member, the misalignment of the pair of arm members in the swing axis direction can be prevented.

In the game machine D1, the bridge member always has a side surface of the other arm member in the swing axis direction and a swing shaft thereof while the moving member is moved between the first position and the second position. A game machine D2 characterized by having overlapping portions that overlap in a directional view.

According to the game machine D2, in addition to the effect of the game machine D1, an overlapping portion is always formed on the bridge member, so that the other arm member can always come into contact with the bridge member, and thus the other arm member. It is possible to reliably prevent the displacement of the sway in the swing axis direction.

In the game machine D1 or D2, the driving device includes a transmission gear for transmitting a driving force to the one arm member, and the one end of the one arm member is a swing shaft of the one end. A portion in which gear teeth are formed in an arc shape centered on a transmission swing shaft, which is provided with a passive gear portion that is meshed with the transmission gear, and is arranged to face the base member of the one arm member. The gaming machine D3, wherein the side surface and the transmission gear are formed so as to be in contact with each other.

According to the game machine D3, in addition to the effect of the game machine D1 or D2, a transmission gear is arranged between one arm member and the base member, and a side surface of the one arm member which is arranged to face the base member is provided. Since it can be brought into contact with the transmission gear, it is possible to prevent one end of one arm member from being displaced (posture change) in the swing axis direction.

Further, the side surface of one end of one arm member facing the base member is brought into contact with the transmission gear, and the transmission gear is rotated so that one end of one arm member becomes the base member. The swing resistance of one arm member can be reduced as compared with the case where the arm member is in contact with the arm member. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the position of one arm member from shifting in the swing axis direction and reduce the swing resistance at the same time.

In any of the game machines D1 to D3, the one arm member is formed in an area smaller than the area of the one end portion of the one arm member, and is arranged between the arm member and the base member. A game machine D4 characterized by including an area member.

According to the game machine D4, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines D1 to D3, the small area member reduces the contact area between the base member and one arm member, so that one arm member swings. The resistance during movement is reduced. As a result, the driving force of the driving device can be suppressed.

In the game machine D4, the small area member is formed from a shape having a longitudinal direction and a lateral direction formed shorter than the longitudinal direction, and the longitudinal direction is the one end portion of the one arm member. A game machine D5 characterized in that it is fixed to the one arm member in a posture along a direction connecting the other end.

According to the game machine D5, in addition to the effect of the game machine D4, the small area member has one arm in a posture along the longitudinal direction in the direction connecting one end of one arm member and the other end. Since the contact range between the small area member and the base member, which is fixed to the member and along the direction connecting one end of one arm member and the other end, is increased, the other end of one arm member is increased. Can improve resistance to deformation of one arm member as it approaches or separates from the base member.

Further, by forming the small area member into a shape having a longitudinal direction and a lateral direction, the contact area between one arm member and the base member can be reduced as compared with the case where the small area member has a circular shape having a large diameter. Can be done.

In the game machine D5, the outer shape of the small area member has a deformed shape including a main body circle formed by the diameter in the lateral direction and a line drawn from the end portion in the longitudinal direction to the main body circle. A straight line connecting the transmission swing shaft of the one arm member and the rotation shaft of the transmission gear always intersects the outer shape portion of the main body circle in the outer shape of the small area member. Game machine D6.

According to the game machine D6, in addition to the effect of the game machine D5, the outer shape of the main body circular portion formed by the diameter of the small area member in the lateral direction is the rotation of the transmission swing shaft and the transmission gear of one arm member. Since it always intersects the straight line connecting the shafts, even if the distance between the shafts of the small area member and the transmission gear is the same, the straight line connecting the shafts goes from the longitudinal end of the small area member to the main body circle. The contact area between the transmission gear and the side surface of one arm member on the base member side can be increased as compared with the case where the line intersects with the drawn line. As a result, it is possible to prevent one arm member from being displaced in the swing axis direction.

In any of the game machines D3 to D6, the passive gear portion is extended in the axial direction along the side surface opposite to the transmission gear in the side surface in the swing axis direction, and the gear teeth of the passive gear portion are extended. The transmission gear includes an umbrella portion formed in a covering manner, and the transmission gear is formed in a two-stage gear shape in which gears are laminated in two stages, and the first gear portion of the first stage is the one arm member and the base. It is formed between the member and the second gear portion of the second stage so as to be meshed with the passive gear portion and to be in contact with the umbrella portion in the rotation axis direction of the transmission gear. Characterized game machine D7.

According to the game machine D7, in addition to the effect exerted on any of the game machines D3 to D6, the transmission gear is formed by the two-stage gear, and the first gear portion of the two-stage gear is the base member of one arm member. Since the second gear portion can be brought into contact with the umbrella portion of the passive gear portion and can be brought into contact with the side surface, the contact portion between the transmission gear and one arm member can be increased. Thereby, the wobbling of one arm member can be suppressed.

In the game machine D7, the first position is an overhang position formed on the front side of the liquid crystal display device, and the umbrella portion is the said portion of the one arm member in the radial direction of the passive gear portion. A support portion extending beyond the distance between the transmission swing shaft and the rotation shaft of the transmission member is provided, and the support portion is the transmission gear in a state where the moving member is arranged at the overhang position. The gaming machine D8, which is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the axial side surface of the second gear portion.

According to the game machine D8, in addition to the effect of the game machine D7, the support portion is placed on the second gear portion of the transmission gear in a state where the moving member is arranged at the overhanging position and the movement in the swing axis direction is most likely to occur. Since it is formed so as to be abuttable, it is possible to suppress the movement of one arm member in the swing axis direction by the abutting.

In any of the game machines D1 to D8, the bridge member is supported by the one arm member at two points, and the straight line connecting the support points is 90 degrees larger than 0 degrees with the longitudinal direction of the one arm member. A game machine D9 characterized in forming a smaller predetermined angle.

According to the game machine D9, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines D1 to D8, the bridge member is supported by one arm member at two points, and the straight line connecting the support points is the longitudinal direction of the one arm member. Since it forms a predetermined angle larger than 0 degrees and smaller than 90 degrees, the load applied to one arm member due to contact between the other arm member and the bridging member is rotated about the longitudinal direction of one arm member. It can be divided into a twisting direction, which is a direction, and a bending direction in which one arm member falls in the longitudinal direction. As a result, the degree to which one arm member is deformed in one direction can be reduced.

In any of the game machines D1 to D9, the bridge members are arranged side by side in a pair in the longitudinal direction of the one arm member, and the pair of bridge members have substantially the same separation distance from the one arm member. Of the pair of bridge members, one bridge member on the side closer to the one end of the one arm member is closer to the other end of the one arm member. The gaming machine D10 is characterized in that deformation resistance is formed larger than that of the other bridge member on the side.

According to the game machine D10, a pair of bridge members are arranged side by side in the longitudinal direction of one arm member, and one of the pair of bridge members is compared with the other bridge member. Therefore, a large deformation resistance is formed. That is, one bridge member arranged on the side closer to the base member is more easily deformed than the other bridge member arranged on the side closer to the moving member.

In the bending deformation of the other arm member, one end pivotally supported by the base member is used as an axis, and the other end pivotally supported by the moving member moves in the axial direction due to the weight of the moving member or the like. It happens by that. Therefore, when the pair of bridging members are formed with substantially the same distance from one arm member, the other arm member and the other bridging member are compared with the one bridging member. Contact early.

Here, when the deformation resistance of the other bridge member is as large as the deformation resistance of one bridge member, a situation occurs in which the load from the other arm member is received by only the other bridge member alone, and the other. The durability of the bridge member is reduced.

On the other hand, according to the game machine D10, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines D1 to D9, the deformation resistance of the other bridge member is smaller than that of one bridge member, and the other arm member. By deforming the other bridge member before the bridge member comes into contact with the one bridge member, the pair of bridge members can receive the load from the other arm member. Therefore, since the load from the other arm member can be distributed to the pair of bridge members to bear the load, the durability of the pair of bridge members can be improved.

As a method of reducing the deformation resistance of the other bridge member as compared with the deformation resistance of one bridge member, different materials are used, and the material of the other bridge member is used as the material of one bridge member. A method using a material having a lower rigidity than that of the material is exemplified. Further, when the materials are the same, a method of making the cross-sectional coefficient of the other bridge member smaller than the cross-sectional coefficient of the one bridge member, or a method of forming reinforcing ribs on one bridge member. Etc. are exemplified.

In the game machine D10, the bridge member is a columnar portion inserted through the one arm member, and extends adjacent to a fixing portion fixed to the one arm member and the fixing portion thereof. It is a columnar portion and includes a detent pin portion that abuts on the seat surface with the one arm member in the extending direction, and the fixing portion of the one bridge member is the detent pin portion. The other bridging member is arranged so as to be separated from the other arm member, and the fixing portion is arranged closer to the other arm member than the detent pin portion. Game machine D11.

According to the game machine D11, the bridge member includes a fixing portion fixed to one arm member and a detent pin portion that comes into contact with the one arm member on the seat surface.

In one bridge member, the fixing portion is arranged so as to be separated from the other arm member by the detent pin portion (the detent pin portion is disposed between the fixing portion and the other arm member). .. Therefore, when the other arm member comes into contact with the one bridge member and the one bridge member is turned up with the fixed portion as the starting point, the detent pin portion separates from the one arm member.

On the other hand, in the other bridge member, the fixing portion is arranged closer to the other arm member than the detent pin portion (the fixing portion is arranged between the detent pin portion and the other arm member). Will be set up). Therefore, when the other arm member comes into contact with the other bridge member and the other bridge member is turned up from the fixed portion, the seating surface of the detent pin portion moves in the direction of being pressed against the one arm member. ..

Therefore, according to the game machine D11, in addition to the effect of the game machine D10, the seating surface of the detent pin portion is pressed against one arm member to increase the deformation resistance, so that the deformation resistance is increased as compared with the one bridge member. The other bridge member can be made less likely to turn over.

Here, "turning over" means that the bridge member receives a force from the other arm member and is peeled off from one arm member.

In the game machine D10 or D11, the bridge member is a columnar portion inserted into the one arm member, includes a fixing portion fixed to the one arm member, and is a bridge member of the one. A game characterized in that the embedding depth of the fixed portion of the other bridging member in the one arm member is deeper than the embedding depth of the fixed portion in the one arm member. Machine D12.

According to the game machine D12, in addition to the effect of the game machine D10 or D11, the bridge member is provided with a fixing portion in which the bridge member is fixed to one arm member, and the embedding depth of the fixing portion in one arm member is increased. Since the other bridge member is deeper than one bridge member, the other bridge member can be firmly fixed to one arm member as compared to one bridge member, and one The other bridge member can be made less likely to turn over than the bridge member.

In any of the game machines D10 to D12, the bridge member is a columnar portion inserted into the one arm member, and includes a fixing portion fixed to the one arm member. The length at which the fixed portion of the other bridge member projects from the side surface of the one arm member as compared with the length at which the fixed portion of one bridge member projects from the side surface of the one arm member. The gaming machine D13, which is characterized by being shorter.

According to the game machine D13, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines D10 to D12, the bridge member is provided with a fixing portion, and after the fixing portion is fixed to one arm member, the fixing portion is on one side. Since the length overhanging from the arm member is shorter in the other bridge member than in one bridge member, the length of the other bridge member is shorter than that of the other bridge member. The deformation resistance can be increased. Therefore, the other bridge member can be made more difficult to turn over than the one bridge member.

In any of the game machines D10 to D13, the other in the direction of the load given by the other arm member as compared with the cross-sectional coefficient of the one bridge member in the direction of the load given by the other arm member. The gaming machine D14 is characterized in that the cross-sectional coefficient of the bridge member is larger.

According to the game machine D14, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines D10 to D13, the cross-sectional coefficient of one bridge member in the direction of the load applied from the other arm member is compared with that of the other arm member. Since the cross-sectional coefficient of the other bridge member in the direction of the applied load is formed to be larger, the deformation resistance of one bridge member due to the difference in shape between one bridge member and the other bridge member. In comparison, the deformation resistance of the other bridge member can be increased.

In any of the game machines D1 to D14, the bridge member includes a projecting portion projecting from a side surface that comes into contact with the other arm member, and the projecting portion includes the moving member having the first portion. When it is arranged at one position, it can come into contact with the other arm member, and when the moving member is arranged at the second position, it cannot come into contact with the other arm member. A game machine D15 characterized by this.

According to the game machine D15, the projecting portion is projected from the bridge member. The protruding portion can come into contact with the other arm member when the moving member is placed in the first position, and abuts with the other arm member when the moving member is placed in the second position. It is considered impossible.

As a result, according to the game machine D15, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines D1 to D14, when the moving member is arranged at the first position, the distance between the bridge member and the other arm member is increased. It can be narrowed by the amount of the projecting portion, and the other arm member and the bridge member can be brought into contact with each other from the small deformation of the other arm member in the swing axis direction. On the other hand, when the moving member is arranged at the second position, a large distance between the bridge member and the other arm member is secured, and the resistance when moving the moving member from the second position increases. It can be suppressed.

In this configuration, for example, when the moving member is arranged at the first position, the amount of movement of the other arm member in the swing axis direction is large, while the moving member is arranged at the second position. Is effective when the amount of movement of the other arm member in the swing axis direction is so small that it can be ignored. That is, for example, when the moving member is arranged at the first position, a load is applied from the moving member in the direction of bending the other arm member along the longitudinal direction, while the moving member is arranged at the second position. In this case, it is effective when a load is applied from the moving member in the direction of twisting the other arm member along the lateral direction.

In any of the game machines D1 to D15, the width of the bridge member in the portion overlapping the side surface of the other arm member is compared with the width of the bridge member in the portion overlapping the side surface of the one arm member. A game machine D16 characterized in that it is formed thinner.

According to the game machine D16, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines D1 to D15, the portion overlapping the side surface of the other arm member as compared with the width of the bridge member in the portion overlapping the side surface of one arm member. Since the width of the bridge member is formed narrower in the above, when the other arm member and the bridge member come into contact with each other and the bridge member is deformed, one arm member and the other arm member are continuously provided. It is possible to prevent the bridge member from twisting around the direction of the bridge.

That is, the deformation of the bridge member can be easily limited to the bending deformation along the direction in which one arm member and the other arm member are continuously provided. Therefore, for example, when forming a portion for improving the deformation resistance against bending or twisting of the bridge member, the arrangement can be limited to a place where the resistance to bending deformation of the bridge member is increased, and the bridge can be constructed. The configuration of the members can be simplified.

In any of the game machines D1 to D16, when the moving member is arranged at at least one of the first position or the second position, the moving member is supported above the base member and the center of gravity of the moving member. Is formed at a position closer to the other arm member than the one arm member, and at a position separated from the other arm member on the bridge member side in the swing axis direction of the other arm member. A game machine D17 characterized by being played.

According to the game machine D17, the center of gravity of the moving member is closer to the other arm member than one arm member, and the other arm member is closer to the bridge member side in the swing axis direction of the other arm member. It is formed at a position away from. Therefore, when the moving member is supported above the base member, the weight of the moving member is applied to the other arm member more than that of one arm member. In this case, the other arm member can be made easier to bend as compared with one arm member.

Therefore, according to the game machine D17, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines D1 to D16, when the pair of arm members bend due to the weight of the moving member, the other arm member comes into contact with the bridge member. This can be facilitated, and it is possible to prevent the pair of arm members from being displaced due to the one arm member bending toward the bridge member side as compared with the other arm member.

<An example of the technical idea of irradiating light from the outside of the game area to the inside of the game area>
A game machine including a rail member forming an outer frame of a game area and an irradiation device arranged outside the rail member and irradiating light inward of the rail member. The gaming machine E1 characterized in that the light emitted from the rail member travels on the back surface side of the rail member.

There is a game machine that is arranged inside the game area in a front view and is provided with an irradiation device that irradiates light from the back side of the game area, and the irradiation device is used to produce an effect (see, for example, JP2012-081031). .. However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, in order to prevent the irradiation device such as an LED from being exposed in the front view in the game area, a cover member for blindfolding is arranged in front of the irradiation device. Since it is necessary to paint the board surface, there is a problem that the degree of freedom in designing the decoration of the game area is reduced.

On the other hand, according to the game machine E1, an irradiation device that irradiates light inward of the game area through the back side of the rail member forming the outer frame of the game area is arranged outside the rail member. Since it is possible to prevent the irradiation device such as an LED from being exposed and visually recognized inside the game area, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in designing the decoration of the game area.

By arranging the irradiation device arranged outside the game area on the back side of the plate member such as the outer edge member, the irradiation device can be made invisible from the front.

In the game machine E1, the light emitted from the irradiation device is emitted toward the large winning opening where the ball wins, and the traveling direction of the light emitted from the irradiation device is directed to the front side on the outer edge of the large winning opening. A game machine E2 characterized in that a direction changing portion for changing in a facing direction is formed.

Here, when the irradiation device is arranged outside the rail member, it is necessary to direct the light of the irradiation device toward the front side in order to direct the irradiated light toward the player side. Since the depth in the front-rear direction in which the irradiation device can be arranged is limited, it becomes difficult to direct the light of the irradiation device in the direction toward the front side. Therefore, a changing member that reflects the light emitted from the irradiating device to change the traveling direction toward the front side is required, and the changing member is arranged inside the game area. In this case, in order to prevent the changing member from being exposed in front view, it may be necessary to dispose a cover member for blindfolding in front of the changing member or paint the board surface. There was a problem that the degree of freedom in designing the decoration of the area was reduced.

On the other hand, according to the game machine E2, in addition to the effect of the game machine E1, the light emitted from the irradiation device is irradiated toward the large winning opening, and the outer edge of the large winning opening is irradiated from the irradiation device. A directional change part is formed that changes the traveling direction of the light toward the front side, but the outer edge of the large winning opening is the part that the player aims to win the ball, and it can be seen exposed from the front. Since it is a possible part, it is possible to eliminate the need for a cover member or the like for blindfolding, and it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in designing the decoration of the game area.

In addition, as a mode in which the direction changing portion is formed on the outer edge of the large winning opening, the wall surface of the opening of the large winning opening is formed so as to be inclined at an angle capable of reflecting the light emitted from the irradiation device toward the front side. Examples thereof include a mode in which the upper lid member for opening and closing the large winning opening is formed by inclining the light emitted from the irradiation device toward the front side at an angle that can be reflected.

In the game machine E2, it is possible to form a closed state in which the flow path of the ball to the large winning opening is closed and an open state in which the flow path of the ball to the large winning opening is opened, and the outer edge of the large winning opening is formed. The upper lid member to be formed is provided, and the upper lid member is provided with the direction changing portion, and in either the state where the upper lid member forms the closed state or the open state, the direction changing portion is said to be said. The gaming machine E3, characterized in that the light emitted from the irradiating device reaches.

Here, it is difficult to dispose an irradiation device such as an LED on the upper lid member arranged in the large winning opening because the upper lid member becomes large. Therefore, it was difficult to make the upper lid member emit light.

On the other hand, according to the game machine E3, in addition to the effect of the game machine E2, the direction changing portion for directing the traveling direction of the light emitted from the irradiation device to the front side is a closed state and an open state of the large winning opening. Since it is formed on the upper lid member that forms the outer edge of the large winning opening, the player can visually recognize the direction changing portion of the upper lid member as if it is emitting light, and the size of the upper lid member is suppressed. At the same time, the ability of the upper lid member as an effect portion can be improved.

Further, since the state of the upper lid member is switched, whether or not the light reaches the direction changing portion changes, so it is confirmed whether or not the direction changing portion of the upper lid member is visually recognized as if it is emitting light. By doing so, it is possible to confirm whether the large winning opening is open or closed. This makes it easy to check the state of the big winning opening.

In addition, as a mode in which whether or not the light reaches the direction changing portion is changed by switching the state of the upper lid member, a mode in which a member capable of shielding the light is arranged before reaching the direction changing portion, or An embodiment in which the output of the irradiation device is turned on / off according to the switching of the state of the upper lid member is exemplified.

Examples of the formation mode of the upper lid member include a mode in which the game area slides in and out in the front-rear direction, and a mode in which a pair of long plate members arranged to face each other swing in a shaft parallel to the front-rear direction.

The game machine E3 is provided with a shielding portion formed so as to be able to shield the light emitted from the irradiation device, and when the grand prize opening forms either the open state or the closed state, the light is irradiated from the irradiation device. When the light reaches the direction changing portion and the large winning opening forms the other of the open state and the closed state, the light emitted from the irradiation device toward the direction changing portion is shielded by the shielding portion. A game machine E4 characterized by being played.

According to the game machine E4, in addition to the effect of the game machine E3, the shielding portion is formed in a manner capable of shielding the light emitted from the irradiation device, and the large winning opening is closed or opened depending on whether the winning opening is closed or open. , Whether the light emitted from the irradiation device toward the direction change part reaches the direction change part, or does the light reach the direction change part by arranging the shielding part between the irradiation device and the direction change part? Therefore, it is possible to change the state in which the direction changing portion of the upper lid member is visually recognized as if it emits light only by the operation required for the upper lid member to continue the game. Therefore, the upper lid member can be used for both the role of controlling the passage of the ball to the large winning opening and the role of producing an effect by the light emitted from the irradiation device.

Examples of the shielding portion include a metal rail member that divides the game area, a painted portion painted on the board surface of the game board, and a decorative plate formed so as to project from the board surface of the game board to the front side. That is, when the shielding portion is formed of the rail member, the rail member is used for both the purpose of forming the outer frame of the game area and the purpose of the shielding portion.

In the game machine E3 or E4, the front plate member is provided on the front side of the large winning opening and the light that reaches the direction changing portion and the traveling direction changes reaches, and the front plate member is the said. The gaming machine E5 is formed so as to cover the large winning opening in a front view, and the direction changing portion collects light on a predetermined portion of the front plate member.

Here, there is a game machine in which a front plate member is arranged on the front side of the large winning opening, and the front plate member covers the large winning opening in front view. In such a game machine, it is possible to prevent the inside of the large winning opening from being visually recognized, and it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in designing the inside of the large winning opening. On the other hand, in this case, the light emitted from the irradiation device to the large winning opening is visually recognized through the front plate member, so it is necessary to increase the intensity of the light in order to maintain the effect of the light emitted from the irradiation device. There is a problem that the irradiation device that can be used is limited.

On the other hand, according to the game machine E5, in addition to the effect of the game machine E3 or E4, the direction changing portion that changes the traveling direction of the light toward the front plate member collects the light at a predetermined portion of the front plate member. Since the light is emitted, the intensity of the light reaching a predetermined portion of the front plate member can be increased without changing the irradiation device.

In addition, as a mode for condensing light, a mode in which the direction changing portion is formed in a dogleg shape and the side facing the front plate member is opened, or a mode in which the direction changing portion is formed in a parabolic shape and the side facing the front plate member is opened. The mode to be used is exemplified.

In any of the game machines E3 to E5, when the large winning opening forms the open state, the light emitted from the irradiating device reaches the direction changing portion, and the ball winning the prize in the large winning opening is The gaming machine E6 is characterized in that the light emitted from the irradiation device is blocked from reaching the direction changing portion by crossing the light emitted from the irradiation device.

According to the game machine E6, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines E3 to E5, when the large winning opening is opened, the light emitted from the irradiation device reaches the direction changing portion, and the large winning opening is opened. By crossing the light emitted from the irradiation device, the winning sphere blocks the light emitted from the irradiation device from reaching the direction changing part, so whether the direction changing part is visually recognized brightly or darkly. , It can be confirmed that the ball has won the big prize opening. As a result, for example, even when the large winning opening is invisible in front view, it is possible to confirm that the ball has won the large winning opening by visually recognizing the light emitted from the irradiation device. It is not necessary to look into the winning opening from diagonally above, and the burden on the player can be eased.

Here, for example, when the irradiation direction of the light faces the flow direction of the sphere, the light is shielded by the first sphere regardless of whether one sphere wins the large winning opening or a plurality of spheres win in a row. It is difficult to determine the number of winning balls by light because it is only a winning ball.

On the other hand, according to the game machine E6, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines E3 to E5, the sphere crosses the light emitted from the irradiating device, so that the sphere and the light face each other or the sphere is light. Unlike the case where the light flows down along the irradiation direction of the above, the light emitted from the irradiation device is shielded for each ball that has won the grand prize opening. As a result, even when the balls are connected to the large winning opening to win a prize, the light can be shielded for each ball, and the number of balls won in the large winning opening can be determined by the light.

In addition, since the sphere crosses the light, the sphere that has won the big prize opening is compared with the case where the flow direction of the sphere and the traveling direction of the light face each other or the sphere flows down along the irradiation direction of the light. Since the period for blocking light can be shortened and the period for which the direction changing portion is visually recognized brightly can be lengthened, the effect ability of the direction changing portion can be ensured.

In the game machine E6, the game machine E6 includes a front plate member which is arranged on the front side of the large winning opening and reaches the direction changing portion and the light whose traveling direction has changed reaches, and the direction changing portion is the front plate. The gaming machine E7 is characterized in that the irradiation device is formed by condensing light on a predetermined portion of a member and irradiating light from a plurality of locations, and the spheres individually cross the light emitted from the respective locations. ..

According to the game machine E7, in addition to the effect of the game machine E6, it is provided on the front side of the grand prize opening and has a front plate member which reaches the direction changing portion and reaches the light whose traveling direction has changed. Since the direction changing portion collects light on a predetermined portion of the front plate member, for example, when light of a plurality of colors is irradiated from an irradiation device, the light of the color actually irradiated and the light of each color are combined. The light of the desired color can be visually recognized through the front plate member.

Further, the irradiation device is formed in a manner of irradiating light from a plurality of places, and since the spheres individually cross the light radiated from each place, the light radiated to the front plate member at the timing when the spheres flow down. The mode can be changed.

For example, consider a case where the irradiation device includes a pair of points for irradiating light, one part irradiates "blue" color light, and the other part irradiates "red" color light. In this case, the light focused on the front plate member can be visually recognized as "blue", "purple (overlapping portion)", and "red".

Here, if the sphere flows down in a manner that crosses the light emitted from one part and shields the light, the "blue" color light is blocked, so that the front plate member has a "red" color. Only the light of is visible.

On the other hand, if the sphere flows down in a manner that crosses the light emitted from the other part and blocks the light, the "red" color light is blocked, so that the front plate member has a "blue" color. Only light is visible.

In this way, the mode of light visually recognized by the front plate member can be changed depending on where the sphere shields the light emitted. Since this change in the light mode is caused by a sphere that flows down the game area in a random path while colliding with a nail or the like, the change in the light mode can be caused at a random timing. That is, as compared with the case where the mode of the light emitted from the irradiation device is changed by electronic control, it is possible to perform an effect rich in randomness, and it is possible to improve the effect.

In any of the game machines E2 to E7, the game is characterized in that the large winning opening is arranged below the center of the gaming area, and the lower edge of the rail member forms the lower side of the opening of the large winning opening. Machine E8.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine in which a large winning opening is arranged below the liquid crystal display device (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-210238). However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, an out opening is formed at the lower edge of the game area, and a liquid crystal display device is formed above the large winning opening arranged above the out opening, so that the large winning opening is formed. There is a problem that the driving device of the above prevents lowering the lower edge of the liquid crystal display device and hinders the increase in size of the liquid crystal display device.

On the other hand, according to the game machine E7, the lower edge of the rail member forms the lower side of the opening of the large winning opening. In this case, by forming the opening with reference to the lowest point of the rail member, the left and right ends of the opening can be formed so as to protrude downward from the game area, and the lower side of the opening can be formed in a straight line. The large winning opening can be formed in a small space.

Further, by arranging the large winning opening in the area including the lower edge of the rail member, which is generally the place where the out opening is arranged, the position of the drive device configured on the back surface of the large winning opening is lowered. It can be lowered to, which allows the lower edge of the liquid crystal display device to be lowered.

In the game machine E8, the first out port arranged on one side in the left-right direction of the big winning opening and discharging the ball out of the game area and the ball arranged on the other side in the left-right direction of the big winning opening are placed in the game. A second out port that discharges out of the area, a closed state that is arranged above the big winning opening and closes the flow path of the ball to the big winning opening, and a flow path of the ball to the big winning opening. An upper lid member capable of forming an open state is provided, and the upper side of the first out port and the second out port is formed above the upper side surface of the end portion of the upper lid member, and the first By forming the out opening and the lower side of the second out opening below the upper side surface of the end portion of the upper lid member, the first out along the upper side surface of the upper lid member in the closed state of the large winning opening. A gaming machine E9 characterized in that a ball can flow down to a mouth or the second out mouth.

According to the game machine E9, in addition to the effect of the game machine E8, the upper sides of the first out port and the second out port are formed above the upper side surface of the end portion of the upper lid member, and the first out port and the second out port are formed. Since the lower side of the out port is formed below the upper side surface of the end portion of the upper lid member, the upper lid member can be used as the first out port while allowing the ball to be discharged from the first out port or the second out port. And it can be lowered to the same position as the second out port.

In the game machine E9, the game machine E10 is characterized in that the upper side surface of the upper lid member is formed in a shape that is inclined downward in both the left and right directions.

According to the game machine E10, in addition to the effect of the game machine E9, the upper side surface of the upper lid member is formed so as to be inclined downward in both the left and right directions, so that the vertical width of the left and right ends of the large winning opening can be suppressed. it can. As a result, the nail formed in the game area and allowing the ball to flow down toward the winning opening can be translated downward, and the lower edge of the liquid crystal display device can be lowered downward.

In the game machine E9 or E10, the game machine E11 is characterized in that the upper lid member is formed with a plurality of ribs projecting from the lower side surface.

According to the game machine E11, in addition to the effect of the game machine E9 or E10, the ribs are formed on the lower side surface of the upper lid member to increase the rigidity of the upper lid member and prevent the upper lid member from falling down due to the weight of the ball. can do.

In the game machine E11, among the plurality of ribs, the rib formed inside the big winning opening is formed on the back side of the game area in a state where the upper lid member forms the closed state. A game machine E12 characterized by.

According to the game machine E12, in addition to the effect of the game machine E11, the rib formed on the inside of the grand prize opening is formed on the back side of the game area in the state where the upper lid member is in the closed state, so that the ball is formed. It flows down below the upper lid member, and it is possible to secure a sufficient vertical width in which the ball is arranged on the front side of the large winning opening. That is, it is possible to prevent the rib and the sphere from interfering with each other.

In any of the game machines E9 to E12, the direction of the balls is set to the first before the balls flowing down toward the first out port or the second out port reach the first out port or the second out port. A game machine E13 including a ball orientation adjusting unit that directs the first out port or the second out port in the opening direction.

According to the game machine E13, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines E9 to E12, the direction of the ball is directed to the opening direction of the first out port or the second out port by the ball direction adjusting unit, so that the ball is directed to the first out port. It can be easily discharged to the 1-out port or the 2nd out port. As a result, the opening width of the first out opening or the second out opening can be suppressed, so that when the large winning opening, the first out opening and the second out opening are arranged side by side in the left-right direction, their arrangement positions can be set. It can be lowered below the game area.

The game machine E1 includes a direction changing portion that changes the traveling direction of the light emitted from the irradiating device toward the front side, and the board surface forming the back surface of the game area is formed of the transparent resin to change the direction. The gaming machine E14, wherein the portion is formed by being recessed in the thickness direction of the board surface.

Here, when the irradiation device is arranged outside the rail member, it is necessary to direct the light of the irradiation device toward the front side in order to direct the irradiated light toward the player side. Since the depth in the front-rear direction in which the irradiation device can be arranged is limited, it becomes difficult to direct the light of the irradiation device in the direction toward the front side. Therefore, a changing member that reflects the light emitted from the irradiating device to change the traveling direction toward the front side is required, and the changing member is arranged inside the game area. In this case, in order to prevent the changing member from being exposed in front view, it may be necessary to dispose a cover member for blindfolding in front of the changing member or paint the board surface. There was a problem that the degree of freedom in designing the decoration of the area was reduced.

On the other hand, according to the game machine E14, in addition to the effect of the game machine E1, the board surface forming the back surface of the game area is formed of the transparent resin, and the traveling direction of the light emitted from the irradiation device is directed to the front side. Since the direction changing portion for changing the direction is formed by being recessed in the thickness direction of the board surface, it is inconspicuous even when the direction changing portion is exposed in front view, and has an influence on the decoration of the game area. Can be made smaller. As a result, the degree of freedom in designing the decoration of the game area can be improved.

The mode in which the direction changing portion is formed on the board surface includes a mode in which the board surface is cut, a mode in which the board surface is drilled, a mode in which a nail is screwed into the board surface, and a mode in which the direction changing portion is formed on the resin mold of the board surface. An example is a method of forming a recess in a molded product by forming a protrusion corresponding to the above.

The gaming machine E14 is characterized in that the light emitted from the irradiation device and whose traveling direction is changed by the direction changing portion is irradiated from below to the member projecting from the board surface. Game machine E15.

According to the game machine E15, in addition to the effect of the game machine E13, the light emitted from the irradiation device and whose traveling direction is changed by the direction changing portion is emitted from below to the member projecting from the board surface. Since it is irradiated, the shadow formed below the member projecting from the board surface can be brightened by the light emitted from the irradiation device by illuminating the hall. As a result, it is possible to improve the effect ability of the area below the member projecting from the board surface, and it is possible to make the ball easier to see when the ball passes through the area below the member projecting from the board surface. Therefore, it is possible to ease the burden felt by the player because the ball is difficult to see.

Examples of the member projecting from the board surface include nails, wind turbines, and through gates.

A game machine F1 in any one of the game machines A1 to A5, B1 to B6, C1 to C6, D1 to D8, and E1 to E15, wherein the game machine is a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information, and for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to this, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and at the time of the stop. It is a game machine provided with a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the definite identification information of the above is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, and the like are typical examples of the game medium.

A gaming machine F2 characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines A1 to A5, B1 to B6, C1 to C6, D1 to D8, and E1 to E15, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and the ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in a predetermined position in the game area. As a prerequisite for winning a prize (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed by the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable a ball to be won, and is valuable according to the number of winnings. Some are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written on a magnetic card).

In any of the game machines A1 to A5, B1 to B6, C1 to C6, D1 to D8, and E1 to E15, the game machine is a fusion of a pachinko game machine and a slot machine. Machine F3. Among them, as a basic configuration of the fused gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The variation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player is provided on the condition that the definite identification information at the time of stopping is the specific identification information, the ball is used as the game medium, and the identification information is described. A game machine that requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of, and is configured to pay out a large number of balls when a special game state occurs. "
<Others>
In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine including a moving member that is movably formed by being swung by a parallel link (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-210238).
However, the above-mentioned conventional game machine has a problem that there is room for improvement in measures against misalignment of moving members.
The present technical idea has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of suppressing misalignment of moving members.
<Means>
In the gaming machine according to the technical idea 1, the base plate, a pair of arm members whose one end is swingably supported by the base plate, and the other end of the pair of arm members are the one. It is oscillatingly supported by an axis parallel to the axial support direction of the end of the arm, and is formed to be movable between the first position and the second position, which is a position different from the first position. In a gaming machine comprising a moving member and a driving device for generating a driving force of the moving member, and the pair of arm members forming a parallel link, one arm member of the pair of arm members is the said. A bridging member is provided on the side surface in the swing axis direction, and the bridge member is formed so as to be able to abut on the side surface of the other arm member in the pair of arm members in the swing axis direction. To.
The gaming machine according to the technical idea 2 is the gaming machine according to the technical idea 1. The bridge member always has the other one while the moving member is moved between the first position and the second position. It is provided with an overlapping portion that overlaps the side surface of the arm member in the swing axis direction and the side surface in the swing axis direction.
The gaming machine according to the technical idea 3 is the gaming machine according to the technical idea 1 or 2, wherein the driving device includes a transmission gear for transmitting a driving force to the one arm member, and the one arm member. The one end is a portion in which gear teeth are formed in an arc shape centered on a transmission swing shaft which is a swing shaft of the one end, and a passive gear portion meshed with the transmission gear. The side surface of the one arm member, which is arranged to face the base member, and the transmission gear are formed so as to be in contact with each other.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 1, it is possible to suppress the misalignment of the moving member.
According to the game machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effect of the game machine described in the technical idea 1, the misalignment of the moving member can be suppressed regardless of the arrangement of the moving member.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1 or 2, the misalignment of the moving member can be reliably suppressed.

10 Pachinko machine (game machine)
13, 8013 Game board 61 inner rail (rail member)
62 Outer rail (rail member)
65a Specific winning opening (large winning opening)
81 Third symbol display device (liquid crystal display device)
210 Rear case 311c Ball sink rib (ball orientation adjustment part)
314 Out port (1st out port, 2nd out port)
320 Front plate member 321a Ball sink rib (ball direction adjustment part)
331c light irradiation device (irradiation device)
332 Moving upper lid member (upper lid member)
332a1f Front inclined side surface (direction change part)
332a3 Guide rib (part of rib)
332c Central rib (part of rib)
410 Main body member (moving member, first moving member)
416 Shaft branch (1st support)
421 Swing base member (part of the second moving member)
421c Insertion shaft (one end)
422 Decorative member (part of the second moving member)
423, 5423 Connecting member 423b Bent part (intermediate part)
423c Shaft support rod (second support part)
423e Slide shaft (the other end)
424, 5424 Guide plate (base member)
424b, 4424b Guide hole (guidance route)
430 Swing member (auxiliary member)
440 Leg member (part of slide mechanism)
460 Drive device 480, 9480 Wiring guide arm (wiring auxiliary member)
481, 9481 First guide arm (arm member)
481a Plate-shaped arm (part of connecting rod, side wall)
481a1 Notch (recessed part)
481b One-sided tubular part (support part)
481c Other side tubular part (support part)
481c1 Enlarged diameter part (second non-contact part)
481d Attachment (part of connecting rod, side wall)
481d1 Arc-shaped attachment part (wall part)
481e Bottom (part of connecting rod, bottom)
481e2 Other side bottom (shaft bottom)
482, 9482 2nd guide arm (arm member)
482a Plate-shaped arm (part of connecting rod, side wall)
482a1 Arc-shaped plate (wall)
482a2 Notch (recessed part)
482b One-sided tubular part (support part)
482b1 reduced diameter part (first non-contact part)
482c Other side tubular part (support part)
482d Attachment (part of connecting rod, side wall)
482e Bottom (part of connecting rod, bottom)
482e1 One side bottom (shaft bottom)
483 3rd guide arm (arm member)
510, 3510 Base member (base plate , part of predetermined member )
512b 2nd shaft (rotating shaft)
520, 2520, 3520, 7520 Drive side arm member (shafted support means)
523 Gear section (passive gear section)
523a Umbrella part 525 Color member (small area member)
525a Main body (main body circle)
528, 2528, 7528 Bridge members 528a, 7528a First bridge member (the other bridge member)
528a2 Insertion part (fixed part)
528a3 Auxiliary protrusion (rotation stop pin)
528a4 rib part (protruding part)
528b, 7528b 2nd bridge member (one bridge member)
528b2 Insertion part (fixed part)
528b3 Auxiliary protrusion (rotation stop pin)
528b4 rib part (protruding part)
530, 7530 Driven side arm member (arm member)
540 Moving member 550 Drive device 553 Transmission gear 553a 1st gear part 553b 2nd gear part
560 Front plate member (part of a predetermined member)
3523b Overhang (support)
4424c Recessed part (braking part)
5425b2 Second inclined surface (braking part)
6480 Wiring guide slide (wiring auxiliary member)
8013c Direction change part 8610 Light irradiation device (irradiation device)
9441d1 Fitting dent (fitting dent)
9484f Detachable front locking member (front locking member)
9484f2 Fitting arm (arm)
9481g Non-slip plate part (positional deviation suppression part)
9484h Other side auxiliary bottom (extended part)
9482f Overhanging front locking part (extended part)
9482g Non-slip plate part (positional deviation suppression part)
C color member (lid member)
N rib part (position shift suppression part)
W wiring

Claims (2)

A predetermined member, a shaft-supported means whose one end is rotatably supported by a first means of the predetermined member , and a first position which is arranged at the other end of the shaft-supported means. In a gaming machine including a moving member configured to be movable between a second position, which is a position different from the first position, and a driving device for generating a driving force of the moving member.
The drive device includes a transmission gear that transmits a driving force to the shaft-supported means.
The predetermined member includes a second means capable of preventing the transmission gear from falling off the central axis.
The one end of the shaft-supported means is a portion in which gear teeth are formed in an arc shape centered on the rotation axis of the one end, and is a passive gear portion meshed with the transmission gear. With
A gaming machine characterized in that a part of the transmission gear is configured to face the shaft-supported means in the direction of the rotation axis. The gaming machine according to claim 1, further comprising a board box.

Images